TR-41.9.1-08-08-002-MR1
Document Cover Sheet
Origination date: 9 July 2008
Project Number
PN-3-0016-RV2 (to become TIA-968-B)
Document Title
PN-3-0016-RV2 (TIA-968-B) Draft Revision 9.0
Source
Scott Roleson, Hewlett-Packard Company
Contact
Scott Roleson
Hewlett-Packard Company
16399 West Bernardo Drive
San Diego, CA 92127 USA
Distribution
TR-41.9.1 at the August 2008 meeting in Halifax
Intended Purpose
of Document
(Select one)
X
Phone: +1-858-655-4809
Fax: +1-858-655-5931
Email: [email protected]
For Incorporation Into TIA Publication
For Information
Other (describe) -
The document to which this cover statement is attached is submitted to a formulating group or subelement thereof of the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) in accordance with the
provisions of Sections 6.4.1–6.4.6 inclusive of the TIA Engineering Manual dated March 2005, all of
which provisions are hereby incorporated by reference.
Abstract
Revision 9.0 of PN-3-0016-RV2, to become TIA-968-B, is attached. A revision log is
attached to the end of the document showing the changes made to arrive at this revision.
See also paper contributed to same teleconference with title “Notes to the WG on TIA-968-B
Draft Revision 9.0” for additional information about this draft.
Subsequent revisions to this document may be made by others as a way of capturing
changes or edits as a normal part of the document development process. In order to avoid
confusion between this document and subsequently revised copies, the editor asks that
anyone making such changes use the MS-Word automatic tracking feature, change the
filename and last revised date, and make notations on this title page that the file was edited,
the date the last edit was made, and who made the changes.
Please note that this document was written using Microsoft Word 2003/SP3. Any changes
to this document should be made in either the same version of Word or saved in a
compatible file type.
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
This page was intentionally left blank.
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
(To become TIA-968-B)
Telecommunications
Telephone Terminal Equipment
Technical Requirements for Connection of
Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network
DRAFT - Revision 9.0
9 July 2008
Formulated under the cognizance of TIA Technical Regulatory
Requirements Subcommittee TR-41.9
With the approval of TIA Engineering Committee TR-41
User Premises Telecommunications Requirements
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
This page was intentionally left blank.
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
CONTENTS
1
SCOPE, PURPOSE, AND APPLICATION............................................................................... 1
1.1
1.2
1.3
SCOPE ..................................................................................................................................... 1
PURPOSE ................................................................................................................................. 2
APPLICATION .......................................................................................................................... 2
2
NORMATIVE REFERENCES ................................................................................................... 3
3
TERMS AND DEFINITIONS ..................................................................................................... 4
3.1
3.2
4
DEFINITIONS ........................................................................................................................... 4
ACRONYMS & ABBREVIATIONS ........................................................................................... 10
COMMON REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. 12
4.1
ENVIRONMENTAL SIMULATION ............................................................................................ 12
4.1.1
Mechanical shock: ........................................................................................................ 12
4.1.2
Telephone line surge – Type A: .................................................................................... 12
4.1.3
Telephone line surge – Type B: .................................................................................... 14
4.1.4
Power line surge: ......................................................................................................... 16
4.2
LEAKAGE CURRENT LIMITATIONS ....................................................................................... 17
4.2.1
Test interval: ................................................................................................................. 17
4.2.2
Equipment states: ......................................................................................................... 17
4.2.3
Treatment of filters and use of alternative voltage:...................................................... 17
4.2.4
Removal in intentional DC path to ground used for protection purposes: .................. 17
4.2.5
Exclusion for intentional DC conducting path to ground: ........................................... 17
4.2.6
Multiple unit equipment interconnected by cables: ...................................................... 17
4.3
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE LIMITATIONS .................................................................................. 19
4.3.1
General:........................................................................................................................ 19
4.3.2
Connection of non-approved equipment to approved terminal equipment or approved
protective circuitry: ...................................................................................................................... 19
4.3.3
Non-hazardous voltage source: .................................................................................... 19
4.3.4
Intentional paths to ground (as required by clause 4.1): ............................................. 19
4.4
BILLING PROTECTION ........................................................................................................... 21
4.4.1
Call duration requirements on data equipment: .......................................................... 21
4.4.2
Voice and data equipment on-hook signal requirements: ............................................ 22
4.4.3
Signaling interference requirements: ........................................................................... 22
4.4.4
Other billing protection requirements:......................................................................... 23
4.5
ENCODED ANALOG CONTENT .............................................................................................. 24
4.5.1
Encoded analog content limits: .................................................................................... 24
4.5.2
Zero level decoder requirements: ................................................................................. 24
4.6
CONNECTORS & WIRING CONFIGURATIONS ........................................................................ 26
4.6.1
Introduction: ................................................................................................................. 26
4.6.2
Wiring Configurations: ................................................................................................ 26
4.6.3
Multi-line, private branch exchange (PBX), and key telephone systems: .................... 27
4.7
ALLOWABLE NET AMPLIFICATION BETWEEN PORTS........................................................... 28
4.7.1
General:........................................................................................................................ 28
4.7.2
Allowable net amplification between network interface ports: .................................... 28
4.7.3
Allowable net amplification between ports for other approved TE and network
interface ports: ............................................................................................................................. 28
i
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
4.7.4
4.7.5
5
Single frequency (SF) guard band: .............................................................................. 29
SF cut-off: .................................................................................................................... 29
INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................ 31
5.1
ANALOG VOICE BAND INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 31
5.1.1
General analog voice band signal power limits: ......................................................... 31
5.1.2
Limitations on signals not intended for network control signaling: ............................ 31
5.1.3
Limitations on internal signal sources primarily intended for network control
signaling: ..................................................................................................................................... 32
5.1.4
Limitations at the interface from non-approved external signal sources: ................... 32
5.1.5
Through transmission limitations: ............................................................................... 32
5.1.6
Analog voice band transverse balance limits: ............................................................. 40
5.1.7
Loop start interfaces: ................................................................................................... 46
5.1.8
Ground start interfaces: ............................................................................................... 52
5.1.9
Loop reverse battery – incoming: ................................................................................ 59
5.1.10 E&M: ........................................................................................................................... 62
5.1.11 Off premises station (OPS): ......................................................................................... 66
5.1.12 Private line: ................................................................................................................. 71
5.2
DIGITAL INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 75
5.2.1
Local area data channel (LADC): ............................................................................... 75
5.2.2
Subrate digital service: ................................................................................................ 86
5.2.3
Public switched digital service (PSDS): ...................................................................... 93
5.2.4
DS1 and ISDN PRI terminal equipment: ..................................................................... 98
5.3
IDSN & DSL INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................ 103
5.3.1
Basic rate ISDN (ISDN BRI) and IDSL: .................................................................... 104
5.3.2
ADSL, ADSL2, ADSL2+, and reach extended ADSL (READSL) modes: .................. 105
5.3.3
ADSL2 and ADSL2+ all digital mode: ...................................................................... 115
5.3.4
SHDSL, ESHDSL: ...................................................................................................... 122
5.3.5
HDSL2 and SMC4: .................................................................................................... 126
5.3.6
HDSL4: ...................................................................................................................... 130
5.3.7
SDSL: ......................................................................................................................... 133
5.3.8
SMC6, VDSL and VDSL2: ......................................................................................... 135
5.3.9
SMC 2, SMC 3, SMC 7, SMC 8, and other DSL: ....................................................... 157
6
SPECIAL CASES .................................................................................................................... 159
6.1
COMPONENT APPROVAL .................................................................................................... 159
6.1.1
Approved components: ............................................................................................... 159
6.1.2
Demonstration of compliance: ................................................................................... 162
6.1.3
General requirements: ............................................................................................... 162
6.1.4
Environmental simulation, leakage current, and hazardous voltage: ....................... 165
6.1.5
Billing protection and encoded analog content: ........................................................ 166
6.1.6
Analog voice band signal power limitations:............................................................. 166
6.1.7
Through transmission paths: ..................................................................................... 166
6.2
SERIES DEVICES ................................................................................................................. 167
6.2.1
Requirements: ............................................................................................................ 167
ANNEX A (NORMATIVE) – GRANDFATHERED TERMINAL EQUIPMENT ................... 169
ANNEX B (INFORMATIVE) – CROSS REFERENCES TO TIA-968-A ................................. 176
ANNEX C (INFORMATIVE) – INFORMATIVE REFERENCES............................................ 180
ii
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 4.1 – SIMPLIFIED SURGE GENERATOR ...................................................................................... 15
FIGURE 4.2 – OPEN-CIRCUIT VOLTAGE WAVE SHAPE, TR / TD ............................................................... 15
FIGURE 4.3 – SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENT WAVE SHAPE, TR / TD ............................................................. 16
FIGURE 4.XX – ZERO LEVEL DECODER TEST CONFIGURATION ............................................................. 25
FIGURE 4.X – RJ11C/W NETWORK INTERFACE WIRING CONFIGURATION ............................................ 26
FIGURE 5.XX. DATA TERMINAL EQUIPMENT SIGNAL POWER CONTROL RESISTOR NETWORK. ............ 33
FIGURE 4.4 – RESISTIVE TERMINATIONS .............................................................................................. 39
FIGURE 4.10 – ILLUSTRATIVE TEST CIRCUIT FOR TRANSVERSE BALANCE (ANALOG) .......................... 41
FIGURE 4.15 – REQUIRED TERMINATION FOR CONNECTIONS TO NON-APPROVED EQUIPMENT ............ 43
FIGURE 4.13 – REQUIRED TERMINATION FOR CONNECTIONS TO NON-APPROVED EQUIPMENT ............ 45
FIGURE 1.1 – TWO-WIRE LOOP SIMULATOR FOR LOOP START INTERFACES ......................................... 48
FIGURE 1.2 – LOOP SIMULATOR CIRCUIT FOR FOUR-WIRE LOOP START INTERFACES .......................... 49
FIGURE 1.3 – ALTERNATIVE TERMINATION .......................................................................................... 50
FIGURE 1.4 – TWO-WIRE LOOP SIMULATOR FOR GROUND START INTERFACES .................................... 54
FIGURE 1.5 – LOOP SIMULATOR CIRCUIT FOR FOUR-WIRE GROUND START INTERFACES ..................... 55
FIGURE 1.6 – ALTERNATIVE TERMINATION .......................................................................................... 56
FIGURE 1.7 – LOOP SIMULATOR FOR REVERSE BATTERY CIRCUITS...................................................... 59
FIGURE 1.8 – LOOP SIMULATOR CIRCUIT FOR FOUR-WIRE REVERSE BATTERY CIRCUITS .................... 60
FIGURE 1.9 – ALTERNATIVE TERMINATION .......................................................................................... 61
FIGURE 1.10 – E&M TYPES I & II SIGNALING FOR APPROVED TE ON “A” SIDE OF INTERFACE. .......... 63
FIGURE 1.11 – E&M TYPES I & II SIGNALING FOR APPROVED TE ON “B” SIDE OF INTERFACE. .......... 64
FIGURE 1.9 – OFF-PREMISES STATION LOOP SIMULATOR ..................................................................... 67
FIGURE 4.4 – RINGING VOLTAGE TRIP CRITERIA .................................................................................. 69
FIGURE 1.10 – LOOP SIMULATOR CIRCUIT FOR VOICE BAND METALLIC CHANNELS ............................ 71
FIGURE 4.5 – RINGING VOLTAGE TRIP CRITERIA .................................................................................. 73
FIGURE 1.11 – LADC IMPEDANCE SIMULATOR FOR METALLIC VOLTAGE TESTS ................................. 75
FIGURE 4.6 – RINGING VOLTAGE TRIP CRITERIA .................................................................................. 79
FIGURE 4.7 – RESISTIVE TERMINATIONS .............................................................................................. 83
FIGURE 4.11 – TEST CIRCUIT FOR SUBRATE TRANSVERSE BALANCE ................................................... 91
FIGURE 4.14(A) – TRANSVERSE BALANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBRATE EQUIPMENT ....................... 92
FIGURE 1.15 – SIMULATOR CIRCUIT FOR PSDS TYPE II IN ANALOG MODE .......................................... 93
FIGURE 4.11 – TEST CIRCUIT FOR PSDS TRANSVERSE BALANCE ......................................................... 96
FIGURE 4.14(C) – TRANSVERSE BALANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR PSDS EQUIPMENT............................. 97
FIGURE 4.8 – ISOLATED PULSE TEMPLATE AND CORNER POINTS FOR ISDN PRI AND 1.544 MBPS
EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................................... 99
FIGURE 4.11 – TEST CIRCUIT FOR DS1 AND ISDN PRI TRANSVERSE BALANCE ................................ 101
FIGURE 5.3.2-1 – ADSL AND ADSL2 PSD MASK ............................................................................. 106
FIGURE 5.3.2-2 – ADSL2 AND ADSL2+ EXTENDED UPSTREAM OPERATION PSD MASK .................. 108
FIGURE 5.3.2-3 – PSD MASK 1 FOR READSL2 .................................................................................. 111
FIGURE 5.3.2-4 – PSD MASK 2 FOR READSL2 .................................................................................. 112
FIGURE 5.3.2-5 – TRANSVERSE BALANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR ADSL AND OTHER DSL TE ............ 113
FIGURE 5.3.2-6 – LONGITUDINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE TERMINATION FOR ADSL TE.......................... 115
FIGURE 5.3.3-1 – PSD MASK FOR ADSL2 ALL DIGITAL MODE. ......................................................... 117
FIGURE 5.3.3-2 – PSD MASK FOR ADSL2+ ALL DIGITAL MODE ........................................................ 119
FIGURE 5.3.4-1 – LONGITUDINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE TERMINATION FOR SHDSL AND ESHDSL ..... 126
FIGURE 5.3.6-1 – ILLUSTRATED HDSL2 UPSTREAM OPERATION PSD MASK..................................... 127
FIGURE 5.3.6-2 – LONGITUDINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE TERMINATION FOR HDSL2 AND SMC4 .......... 129
iii
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
FIGURE 5.3.7-1 – HDSL4 UPSTREAM OPERATION PSD MASK ........................................................... 131
FIGURE 5.3.7-2 – LONGITUDINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE TERMINATION FOR HDSL4 ............................. 132
FIGURE 5.3.8-2 – VDSL2 PROFILES 8A, 8B, 8C AND 8B UPSTREAM OPERATION OVER POTS PSD MASK
................................................................................................................................................... 138
FIGURE 5.3.8-3 – VDSL2 PROFILES 12A, 12B AND 17A UPSTREAM OPERATION OVER POTS PSD MASK
................................................................................................................................................... 139
FIGURE 5.3.8-4 – VDSL2 PROFILE 30A UPSTREAM OPERATION OVER POTS PSD MASK .................. 141
FIGURE 5.3.8-5 – VDSL2 EU-128 PROFILES 8A, 8B, 8C AND 8B UPSTREAM OPERATION OVER POTS
PSD MASK .................................................................................................................................. 143
FIGURE 5.3.8-6 – VDSL2 EU-128 PROFILES 12A, 12B AND 17A UPSTREAM OPERATION OVER POTS
PSD MASK .................................................................................................................................. 143
FIGURE 5.3.8-7 – VDSL2 EU-128 PROFILE 30A UPSTREAM OPERATION OVER POTS PSD MASK .... 145
FIGURE 5.3.8-8 – VDSL2 PROFILES 8A, 8B, 8C AND 8D UPSTREAM ALL DIGITAL MODE OPERATION
PSD MASK .................................................................................................................................. 147
FIGURE 5.3.8-9 – VDSL2 PROFILES 12A, 12B AND 17A UPSTREAM ALL DIGITAL MODE OPERATION
PSD MASK .................................................................................................................................. 147
FIGURE 5.3.8-10 – VDSL2 PROFILE 30A UPSTREAM ALL DIGITAL MODE OPERATION PSD MASK .... 149
FIGURE 5.3.8-11 – VDSL2 EU-128 PROFILES 8A, 8B, 8C AND 8D UPSTREAM ALL DIGITAL MODE
OPERATION PSD MASK ............................................................................................................... 151
FIGURE 5.3.8-12 – VDSL2 EU-128 PROFILES 12A, 12B AND 17A UPSTREAM ALL DIGITAL MODE
OPERATION PSD MASK ............................................................................................................... 151
FIGURE 5.3.8-13 – VDSL2 EU-128 PROFILE 30A UPSTREAM ALL DIGITAL MODE OPERATION PSD
MASK .......................................................................................................................................... 153
FIGURE 6.1.1 – VALID COMBINATIONS OF APPROVED COMPONENTS ................................................ 160
FIGURE 4.12 – OFF-HOOK TERMINATION OF MULTIPORT EQUIPMENT FOR PORTS NOT UNDER TEST . 167
FIGURE 4.16 – ON-HOOK TERMINATION FOR PORTS NOT UNDER TEST. ............................................. 168
FIGURE 4.17 – ADSL MODEM TERMINATION SIMULATOR. ................................................................ 168
iv
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 4.1 – VOLTAGE APPLIED FOR VARIOUS COMBINATIONS OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS.......... 18
TABLE 4.7.1 – ALLOWABLE NET AMPLIFICATION BETWEEN NETWORK INTERFACE PORTS ................. 29
TABLE 4.7.2 – ALLOWABLE NET AMPLIFICATION BETWEEN PORTS FOR OTHER APPROVED TE AND
NETWORK INTERFACE PORTS ........................................................................................................ 30
TABLE 4.5 – PROGRAMMING RESISTORS .............................................................................................. 34
TABLE 4.19(B) – ANALOG LONGITUDINAL BALANCE ........................................................................... 42
TABLE 4.21 – SIMULATED RINGING VOLTAGES AND IMPEDANCE LIMITATIONS .................................. 50
TABLE 4.21 – SIMULATED RINGING VOLTAGES AND IMPEDANCE LIMITATIONS .................................. 56
TABLE 4.2 – TYPE I E&M, DC POTENTIALS ......................................................................................... 65
TABLE 4.3 – TYPE II E&M, DC POTENTIALS ........................................................................................ 65
TABLE 4.4A – SUMMARY OF RING-TRIP REQUIREMENTS ...................................................................... 69
TABLE 4.22 – TIP-RING IMPEDANCE FOR OFF-PREMISES STATION LOOP .............................................. 70
TABLE 4.4 – SUMMARY OF RING-TRIP REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................ 74
TABLE 4.4 – SUMMARY OF RING-TRIP REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................ 80
TABLE 4.19(A) – TRANSVERSE BALANCE TEST CRITERIA – ANALOG VOICE BAND .............................. 86
TABLE 4.7 – VALUES FOR K AND AVERAGE OUTPUT POWER ................................................................ 88
TABLE 4.8 – DRIVING PULSE AMPLITUDE FOR SUBRATE TERMINAL EQUIPMENT ................................. 88
TABLE 4.9 – MINIMUM ADDITIONAL ATTENUATION FOR SUBRATE TERMINAL EQUIPMENT ................ 89
TABLE 4.10 – ATTENUATION CURVE FOR SUBRATE TERMINAL EQUIPMENT ........................................ 89
TABLE 4.20(B) – FREQUENCY RANGES OF TRANSVERSE BALANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBRATE
EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................................... 90
TABLE 4.20(C) – FREQUENCY RANGES OF TRANSVERSE BALANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBRATE
EQUIPMENT. .................................................................................................................................. 95
TABLE 5.3.1-1 – FREQUENCY RANGES OF TRANSVERSE BALANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR BRI AND IDSL
.................................................................................................................................................... 104
TABLE 5.3.2-1 – PSD MASK DEFINITION FOR ADSL AND ADSL2 ..................................................... 105
TABLE 5.3.2-2 – PSD MASK DEFINITION FOR ADSL2 AND ADSL2+ EXTENDED UPSTREAM OPERATION
.................................................................................................................................................... 107
TABLE 5.3.2-3 – ADDITIONAL PSD MASK REQUIREMENTS FOR EXTENDED UPSTREAM OPERATION . 107
TABLE 5.3.2-4 – IN-BAND PEAK PSD, PSD_INT, AND THE FREQUENCIES F1 AND F_INT ................... 108
TABLE 5.3.2-5 – PSD MASK 1 DEFINITION FOR READSL2 ................................................................ 109
TABLE 5.3.2-6 – PSD MASK 2 DEFINITION FOR READSL2 ................................................................ 110
TABLE 5.3.2-7 – FREQUENCY RANGES OF TRANSVERSE BALANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR ADSL
EQUIPMENT OPERATING WITH POTS .......................................................................................... 113
TABLE 5.3.2-8 – MAXIMUM LONGITUDINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE LIMIT FOR ADSL ............................ 114
TABLE 5.3.2-9 – VALUES OF FB FOR VARIOUS EXTENDED UPSTREAM PSD MASKS OPERATING WITH114
TABLE 5.3.3-1 – PSD MASK DEFINITION FOR ADSL2 ALL DIGITAL MODE ........................................ 116
TABLE 5.3.3-2 – IN-BAND PEAK PSD MASK DESIGNATOR FOR ADSL2 ALL DIGITAL MODE .............. 116
TABLE 5.3.3-3 – PSD MASK DEFINITION FOR ADSL2+ ALL DIGITAL MODE ...................................... 118
TABLE 5.3.3-4 – ADDITIONAL PSD MASK REQUIREMENTS FOR ADSL2+ ALL DIGITAL MODE .......... 118
TABLE 5.3.3-5 – IN-BAND PEAK PSD MASK DESIGNATOR FOR ADSL2+ ALL DIGITAL MODE ........... 119
TABLE 5.3.3-6 – FREQUENCY RANGES OF TRANSVERSE BALANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR ADSL ALL
DIGITAL MODE EQUIPMENT......................................................................................................... 120
TABLE 5.3.3-7 – MAXIMUM LONGITUDINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE LIMIT FOR ADSL ALL DIGITAL MODE
.................................................................................................................................................... 121
TABLE 5.3.3-8 – VALUES OF FB FOR VARIOUS ALL DIGITAL MODE EXTENDED UPSTREAM PSD MASKS.
.................................................................................................................................................... 121
v
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
TABLE 5.3.4-1 – SHDSL SYMMETRIC PSD PARAMETERS ................................................................. 123
TABLE 5.3.4-2 – SYMMETRIC PSD PARAMETERS, 16-TCPAM.......................................................... 124
TABLE 5.3.4-3 – SYMMETRIC PSD PARAMETERS, 32-TCPAM.......................................................... 124
TABLE 5.3.4-4 – FREQUENCY RANGES OF TRANSVERSE BALANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SHDSL AND
ESHDSL EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................. 125
TABLE 5.3.4-5 – MAXIMUM LONGITUDINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE LIMIT FOR SHDSL AND ESHDSL . 125
TABLE 5.3.6-1 – HDSL2 UPSTREAM OPERATION PSD MASK LIMITS ................................................. 127
TABLE 5.3.5-1 – FREQUENCY RANGES OF TRANSVERSE BALANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR HDSL2 AND
SMC4 ......................................................................................................................................... 128
TABLE 5.3.6-3 – MAXIMUM LONGITUDINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE LIMIT FOR HDSL2 AND SMC4....... 129
TABLE 5.3.7-1 – HDSL4 UPSTREAM OPERATION PSD MASK LIMITS ................................................. 130
TABLE 5.3.6-1 – FREQUENCY RANGES OF TRANSVERSE BALANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR HDSL4 ..... 132
TABLE 5.3.7-3 – MAXIMUM LONGITUDINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE LIMIT FOR HDSL4 .......................... 132
TABLE 5.3.7-1 – FREQUENCY RANGES OF TRANSVERSE BALANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR 2B1Q SDSL
................................................................................................................................................... 134
TABLE 5.3.7-2 – MAXIMUM LONGITUDINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE LIMIT FOR SDSL ........................... 134
TABLE 5.3.9-1 – VDSL [QAM/DMT] UPSTREAM OPERATION PSD MASK LIMITS. ........................... 135
TABLE 5.3.8-2 – VDSL2 PROFILES 8A, 8B, 8C, 8D, 12A, 12B, AND 17A UPSTREAM OPERATION OVER
POTS PSD MASK LIMITS ............................................................................................................ 137
TABLE 5.3.8-3 – VDSL2 UPSTREAM OPERATION OVER POTS PSD1, PSD_INT, AND THE FREQUENCIES
FOH AND F_INT ............................................................................................................................ 138
TABLE 5.3.8-4 – VDSL2 PROFILE 30A UPSTREAM OPERATION OVER POTS PSD MASK LIMITS ....... 140
TABLE 5.3.8-5 – VDSL2 EU-128 PROFILES 8A, 8B, 8C, 8D, 12A, 12B AND 17A UPSTREAM OPERATION
OVER POTS PSD MASK LIMITS .................................................................................................. 142
TABLE 5.3.8-6 – VDSL2 EU-128 PROFILE 30A UPSTREAM OPERATION OVER POTS PSD MASK LIMITS
................................................................................................................................................... 144
TABLE 5.3.8-7 – VDSL2 PROFILES 8A, 8B, 8C, 8D, 12A, 12B AND 17A UPSTREAM ALL DIGITAL MODE
OPERATION PSD MASK LIMITS ................................................................................................... 146
TABLE 5.3.8-8 – VDSL2 UPSTREAM ALL DIGITAL MODE OPERATION PSD1, PSD_INT, AND THE
FREQUENCIES FOH AND F_INT ..................................................................................................... 146
TABLE 5.3.8-9 – VDSL2 PROFILE 30A UPSTREAM ALL DIGITAL MODE OPERATION PSD MASK LIMITS
................................................................................................................................................... 148
TABLE 5.3.8-10 – VDSL2 EU-128 PROFILES 8A, 8B, 8C, 8D, 12A, 12B AND 17A UPSTREAM ALL
DIGITAL MODE OPERATION MASK LIMITS ................................................................................... 150
TABLE 5.3.8-11 – VDSL2 EU-128 PROFILE 30A UPSTREAM ALL DIGITAL MODE OPERATION PSD
MASK LIMITS .............................................................................................................................. 152
TABLE 5.3.8-12 – FREQUENCY RANGES OF TRANSVERSE BALANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR SMC6, VDSL
AND VDSL2 EQUIPMENT............................................................................................................ 154
TABLE 5.3.8-13 – MAXIMUM LONGITUDINAL OUTPUT VOLTAGE FOR VDSL2 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
................................................................................................................................................... 155
TABLE 5.3.8-14 – VALUES OF FB FOR VARIOUS VDSL2 UPSTREAM PSD MASKS .............................. 157
TABLE 6.1.1 – APPLICABLE TECHNICAL CRITERIA FOR CN COMPONENT WITH DIGITAL INTERFACE
AND NCTE OR NT1 FUNCTIONS................................................................................................. 163
TABLE 6.1.2 – TIA-968-B AND PART 68 TECHNICAL CRITERIA APPLICABLE TO VARIOUS FEATURES
AND FUNCTIONS ......................................................................................................................... 164
TABLE 6.1.3 – APPLICABLE TECHNICAL CRITERIA FOR CN COMPONENT WITH ANALOG VOICE BAND
INTERFACE.................................................................................................................................. 164
TABLE B.1 – CROSS-REFERENCE TO TIA-968-A AND ITS ADDENDUMS ............................................ 176
vi
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
FOREWORD
(This foreword is not part of this Standard.)
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC), in its Report & Order, FCC 00-400, on
CC Docket No. 99-216, mandated creation of the Administrative Council for Terminal
Attachments (ACTA). In Title 47 of the U.S. Code of Federal Regulations (47CFR) Section
68.7(b), ACTA was charged to adopt and publish technical criteria to prevent harms to the
telephone network submitted to it by standards development organizations accredited by the
American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
The first version of this document was an interim standard (IS) whose contents were
identical to the criteria in 47CFR Part 68 at the time the Report & Order was issued. The
document was advanced from an IS to an ANSI approved standard with the publication of
TIA-968-A in 2002. Five addendums were subsequently published: TIA-968-A-1-2003, TIA968-A-2-2004, TIA-968-A-3-2004, TIA-968-A-4-2006, and TIA-968-A-5-2007.
This Standard is based on TIA-968-A and its addendums A-1, A-2, A-3, A-4 and A-5.
Additional changes include:
1. The clause on leakage current limitations was rewritten for clarity but the
requirements remain the same;
2. Coin deposit signals were added along with DTMF as examples of signals generated
by terminal equipment that are used for network control;
3. Requirements that were inadvertently deleted in TIA-968-A have been restored for
data circuit terminal equipment intended to operate with a programming resistor for
signal level control;
4. Clarified that the tip ground state of loop-start central-office-implemented telephones
does not require transverse balance testing;
5. Clarified in the scope that terminal equipment must comply with the applicable
technical criteria of this Standard at any control adjustment that is employed;
6. Annex A was clarified by limiting the grandfather clauses for non-approved
equipment to the United States;
7. New requirements were added for ADSL all digital mode and reach-extended ADSL.
Other DSL requirements previously referenced from T1.417 were also added;
8. The structure of the document was entirely changed to reflect a redirected emphasis
on interface types instead of test types.
This Standard was produced by TIA Subcommittee TR-41.9, Technical Regulatory
Considerations, and its TR-41.9.1 working group for TIA-968-B. It was developed in
accordance with ANSI and TIA procedural guidelines and represents the consensus position
of the working group and its parent subcommittee, which served as the formulating group. It
has also received the concurrence of Engineering Committee TR-41, User Premises
Telecommunications Requirements. Committee approval of this Standard does not imply
vii
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
that all members voted for its approval.
The leadership of the TR-41.9 Technical and Administrative Regulatory Considerations
subcommittee (Chair: Phillip Havens, Littelfuse, and Working Group Chair: Roger Hunt,
Thomson) acknowledge the contributions provided by the following individuals in the
development of this Standard.
Organization
Representative
TIA-968-A
or addenda
TIA-968-B
Littelfuse (formerly Teccor)
Thomson (formerly ATLINKS)
Hewlett-Packard
ADTRAN, Inc
ATLINKS USA Inc
Bourns (UK)
Broadcom
Cisco Systems
Industry Canada
Industry Canada
Industry Canada
Industry Canada
Intertech Systems
Mitel Networks
NEMKO
Nortel
Paradyne Corporation
Randolph Telecom, Inc.
Sanmina
SBC (now AT&T)
Sharp Electronics
Siemens
Sprint
Tyco Electronics
Underwriters Laboratories
Underwriters Laboratories
Verizon
VTech
Phillip Havens
Roger Hunt
Scott Roleson
Larry Bell
Clint Pinkham
Mick Maytum
Rafi Rahamim
Tim Lawler
Hazim Dawood
Efrain Guevara
Henry Mar
Matthew Mulvihill
Scott Lambert
Greg Slingerland
Pierre Adornato
Roger Britt
Peter Walsh
Joe Randolph
John Shinn
Jimmy Salinas
Bryan Skarbek
Tailey Tung
Cliff Chamney
Al Martin
Randy Ivans
Anh Nguyen
Trone T. Bishop
Stephen R. Whitesell
x
x
x
x
x
–
x
x
–
x
x
x
x
x
–
x
x
–
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
TR41.9 Chair
WG Chair
Editor
–
–
x
–
x
x
–
–
x
–
–
x
–
–
x
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
x
x
Suggestions for improvement of this Standard are welcome. They should be sent to:
Telecommunications Industry Association
Engineering Department
Suite 300
2500 Wilson Boulevard
Arlington, VA 22201
viii
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
1 SCOPE, PURPOSE, AND APPLICATION
1.1
SCOPE
This Standard specifies technical criteria for terminal equipment approved in accordance
with Title 47 of the U.S. Code of Federal Regulations (47CFR), Part 68 for direct connection
to the public switched telephone network, including private line services provided over
wireline facilities owned by providers of wireline telecommunications.
Conformance to the technical criteria in this Standard does not assure compatibility with
wireline carrier services.
Except for the grandfathered terminal equipment identified in Annex A, the technical criteria
in this Standard applies to direct connection of terminal equipment (TE) and certain types of
test equipment (see clause 3.1) to the following types of wireline carrier interfaces:
a) Loop-start (not including party lines)
b) Ground-start
c) Loop reverse battery incoming (e.g., direct inward dialing and public safety
answering point trunks)
d) Loop reverse battery outgoing (e.g., E911 PBX trunks)
e) E&M (e.g., analog tie trunks)
f)
Off-premises station (OPS)
g) Private line
h) Local area data channel
i)
j)
Subrate (e.g., 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and 56 kbps DDS)
PSDS Types I, II, and III
k) DS1 and ISDN PRI (1.544 Mbps)
l)
ISDN BRI and IDSL
m) ADSL, ADSL2, ADSL2+, reach extended ADSL
n) SHDSL and ESHDSL
o) HDSL2 and HDSL4
p) SDSL
q) VDSL
r) VDSL2
Requirements retained by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) in 47CFR Part
68, including hearing aid compatibility and volume control, are not covered by this Standard.
Equipment grandfathered by FCC action is identified in Annex A along with the conditions
that allow such TE to be connected without approval.
1
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
1.2
PURPOSE
The purpose of this Standard is to provide technical criteria to protect wireline carrier
networks from the harms as defined by the Federal Communications Commission in 47CFR
section 68.3. This Standard was developed for submission to the Administrative Council for
Terminal Attachments (ACTA).
1.3
APPLICATION
The technical criteria in this Standard may be applied to terminal equipment (TE) approved
after publication of this document by the ACTA. These criteria shall be applied to new
terminal equipment approved 18 months or more after publication of this document by the
ACTA.
Previously approved TE retains its approval status under the requirements in effect at the
time the TE was approved. All TE shall continue to comply with the requirements in effect
when the TE was approved.
TE that is modified shall be re-approved under the requirements in effect at the time of the
modification, which may be different than the requirements in effect at the time of the prior
approval. Except as otherwise specified, a modification is any change that affects the
compliance of TE to this Standard. TE repair, where no modification has occurred, does not
require re-approval.
Two categories of specifications are used in this Standard, mandatory requirements and
recommendations. Mandatory requirements are designated by the word "shall" and
recommendations by the word "should."
The adjustment of any real or virtual control that is readily accessible by, or intended to be
accessible to the user, either locally or remotely, shall not cause the TE to become noncompliant with this Standard.
2
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
2 NORMATIVE REFERENCES
The following standards contain provisions which, through reference in this text, constitute
provisions of this Standard. At the time of publication, the editions indicated were valid. All
standards are subject to revision, and parties to agreements based on this Standard are
encouraged to investigate the possibility of applying the most recent editions of the
standards indicated below. ANSI and TIA maintain registers of currently valid national
standards published by them. Informative references are provided in Annex C.
1. ITU-T Recommendation G.711 (11/88), General Aspects of Digital Transmission
Systems - Terminal Equipment - Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) of Voice
Frequencies.
2. TIA-1096-A-2008, Telecommunications - Telephone Terminal Equipment Connector Requirements for Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone
Network.
3. ANSI T1.417-2003, Spectrum Management for Loop Transmission Systems
3
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
3 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
For the purposes of this Standard, the following terms and definitions apply.
3.1
DEFINITIONS
NOTE – Additional informative definitions are included in Annex C.
All digital mode: A variant of ADSL2, i.e., version 2 of asymmetric digital subscriber
line.
Approved protective circuitry: Separate, identifiable and discrete electrical circuitry
designed to protect the telephone network from harm, which is approved in
accordance with the rules and regulations in 68.7(b) and Subpart C of 47CFR Part 68.
Approved terminal equipment is terminal equipment approved in accordance with
the rules and regulations in 47CFR Part 68, Subpart C and 68.7(b).
Asymmetric digital subscriber line (ADSL) modem is a modem having transmitting
signal characteristics meeting the spectral response and aggregate power level
limitations of this Standard and the conformance criteria in 6.4.3 of ANSI T1.417-2003.
The term should be interpreted to include variations such as splitterless ADSL, ADSL2,
ADSL2+, and Rate Adaptive DSL (RADSL) that have transmit signal characteristics
meeting these limitations. ADSL2+ modems may receive downstream signals whose
bandwidth is approximately up to twice that of ADSL modems. Thus different
transverse balance limitations have been specified for ADSL2+.
ADSL distribution line unit (ADLU). An ADLU provides ADSL service, for example,
an ADLU card may split voice and data services.
Auxiliary leads: Terminal equipment leads at the interface, other than telephone
connections and leads otherwise defined in this Standard, which leads are to be
connected either to common equipment or to circuits extending to central office
equipment.
Capture level: Equipment with Automatic Gain Control (AGC) signal power limiting
has virtually no output signal for input levels below a certain value. At some input
signal power, the output level will become significant (usually corresponding to the
expected output level) for the service application. The input level at which this occurs
is defined as the ‘‘capture level.’’
Central office implemented telephone: A telephone executing coin acceptance
requiring coin service signaling from the central office.
Channel equipment: Equipment in the private line channel of the telephone network
that furnishes telephone tip and ring, telephone tip-1 and ring-1, and other auxiliary or
supervisory signaling leads for connection at the private line channel interface (where
tip-1 and ring-1 is the receive pair for four-wire telephone connections).
Coin-implemented telephone: A telephone containing all circuitry required to
execute coin acceptance and related functions within the instrument itself and not
requiring coin service signaling from the central office.
Coin service: Central office implemented coin telephone service.
4
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Companion terminal equipment: Companion terminal equipment represents the
terminal equipment that would be connected at the far end of a network facility and
provides the range of operating conditions that the terminal equipment that is being
approved would normally encounter.
Continuity leads: Terminal equipment continuity leads at the network interface
designated CY1 and CY2 which are connected to a strap in a series jack configuration
for the purpose of determining whether the plug associated with the terminal
equipment is connected to the interface jack.
Direct connection: Connection of terminal equipment to the telephone network by
means other than acoustic and/or inductive coupling.
Direct Inward Dialing (DID): A feature that permits incoming PSTN calls to be
routed to a PBX station upon receipt of addressing information.
Dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF): Network control signaling is a method of
signaling using the voice transmission path. The method employs 16 distinct signals
each composed of two voice band frequencies, one from each of two geometrically
spaced groups designated ‘‘low group’’ and ‘‘high group.’’ The selected spacing
assures that no two frequencies of any group combination are harmonically related.
E&M leads: Terminal equipment leads at the interface, other than telephone
connections and auxiliary leads, which are to be connected to channel equipment
solely for the purpose of transferring supervisory signals conventionally known as
Types I and II E&M and schematically shown in figures 1.5 and 1.6.
Encoded analog content is the analog signal contained in coded form within a data
bit stream.
Equivalent power: The power of the analog signal at the output of a zero level
decoder, obtained when a digital signal is the input to the decoder.
Grandfathered terminal equipment: Terminal equipment of a type allowed to be
directly connected to the telephone network under the provisions of 47CFR Part 68
before the effective date of this Standard.
Second generation high bit rate digital subscriber line (HDSL2): HDSL2 is a
transmission system defined in 5.3.4 of T1.417-2003, using asymmetric PSD masks
and 16 level trellis coded pulse amplitude modulation to transport 1536 or 1544 Kbps
over a single, non-loaded twisted pair.
Four-wire second generation high bit rate digital subscriber line (HDSL4):
HDSL4 is defined in 5.4.3 of T1.417-2003. Also using asymmetric PSD masks and 16
level trellis coded pulse amplitude modulation, it transports 1536 or 1544 Kbps over a
single, non-loaded twisted pair.
In-band signaling private line interface: The point of connection between an inband signaling voice band private line and terminal equipment or systems where the
signaling frequencies are within the voice band. All tip and ring leads are treated as
telephone connections for the purposes of fulfilling approval conditions.
Instrument-implemented telephone: A telephone containing all circuitry required to
execute coin acceptance and related functions within the instrument itself and not
requiring coin service signaling from the central office.
ISDN basic rate interface (ISDN BRI): A two-wire interface between the terminal
equipment and ISDN BRI. The tip and ring leads are treated as telephone connections
5
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
for the purpose of fulfilling approval conditions.
ISDN primary rate interface (ISDN PRI): A four-wire interface between the terminal
equipment and 1.544 Mbps ISDN PRI. The tip, ring, tip-1, and ring-1 leads are treated
as telephone connections for the purpose of fulfilling approval conditions.
Local area data channel (LADC) leads: Terminal equipment leads at the interface
used to transmit and/or receive signals which may require greater than voice band
frequency spectrum over private line metallic channels designated Local Area Data
Channels (LADC). These leads are treated as ‘‘telephone connections’’ for the
purpose of fulfilling approval conditions, or as tip and ring connections where the term
‘‘telephone connection’’ is not used.
Local area data channel simulator circuit: A circuit for connection in lieu of a Local
Area Data Channel to provide the appropriate impedance for signal power tests.
Longitudinal voltage: One half of the vector sum of the potential difference between
the tip connection and earth ground, and the ring connection and earth ground for the
tip, ring pair of two-wire and four-wire connections; and, additionally for four-wire
telephone connections, one half of the vector sum of the potential difference between
the tip-1 connection and earth ground and the ring-1 connection and earth ground for
the tip-1, ring-1 pair (where tip-1 and ring-1 are the receive pair).
Loop simulator circuit: A circuit that simulates the network side of a two-wire or fourwire telephone connection during testing.
Make-busy leads: Terminal equipment leads at the network interface designated MB
and MB1. The MB lead is connected by the terminal equipment to the MB1 lead when
the corresponding telephone line is to be placed in an unavailable or artificially busy
condition.
Metallic voltage: The potential difference between the tip and ring connections for
the tip, ring pair of two-wire and four-wire connections and additionally for four-wire
telephone connections, between the tip-1 and ring-1 connections for the tip-1, ring-1
pair (where tip-1 and ring-1 are the receive pair).
Multi-port equipment: Equipment that has more than one telephone connection with
provisions internal to the equipment for establishing transmission paths among two or
more telephone connections.
Network port: An equipment port of approved protective circuitry which port faces the
telephone network.
Off-premises line simulator circuit is a load impedance for connection, in lieu of an
off-premises station line, to PBX (or similar) telephone system loop start circuits during
testing.
Off-premises station (OPS) interface: The point of connection between PBX
telephone systems (or similar systems) and telephone company private line
communication facilities used to access approved station equipment located off the
premises. Equipment leads at this interface are limited to telephone tip and ring leads
(designated T(OPS) and R(OPS)) where the PBX employs loop-start signaling at the
interface. Unless otherwise noted, all T(OPS) and R(OPS) leads are treated as
telephone connections for purposes of fulfilling approval conditions.
One-port equipment: Equipment that has either exactly one telephone connection, or
a multiplicity of telephone connections arranged so that no transmission occurs among
6
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
such telephone connections, within the equipment.
Overload point: For signal power limiting circuits incorporating automatic gain control
method, the “overload point” is the value of the input signal that is 15 dB greater than
the capture level. For signal power limiting circuits incorporating peak limiting method,
the ”overload point” is defined as the input level at which the equipment’s through gain
decreases by 0.4 dB from its nominal constant gain.
Power connections: The connections between commercial power and any
transformer, power supply rectifier, converter or other circuitry associated with
approved terminal equipment or approved protective circuitry. The following are not
power connections. (a) Connections between approved terminal equipment or
approved protective circuitry and sources of non-hazardous voltages. (b) Conductors
that distribute any power within approved terminal equipment or within approved
protective circuitry. (c) Green wire ground (the grounded conductor of a commercial
power circuit that is UL-identified by a continuous green color).
Private line channels are telephone company dedicated facilities and channel
equipment used in furnishing private line service from the telephone network for the
exclusive use of a particular party or parties.
PSDS type II analog mode loop simulator circuit: A circuit simulating the network
side of the two-wire telephone connection that is used for testing terminal equipment to
be connected to the PSDS Type II loops.
Public switched digital service type I (PSDS type I): This service functions only in
a digital mode. It employs a transmission rate of 56 Kbps on both the transmitting and
receiving pairs to provide a four-wire full duplex digital channel. Signaling is
accomplished using bipolar patterns that include bipolar violations.
Public switched digital service type II (PSDS type II): This service functions in two
modes, analog and digital. Analog signaling procedures are used to perform
supervisory and address signaling over the network. After an end-to-end connection is
established, the switched Circuit Data Service Unit SCDSU) is switched to the digital
mode. The time compression multiplexing (TCM) transmission operated at a digital
transmission speed of 144 Kbps to provide full-duplex 56 Kbps on the two-wire access
line.
Public switched digital service type III (PSDS type III): This service functions only
in a digital mode. It uses a time compression multiplexing (TCM) rate of 160 Kbps,
over one pair, to provide two full-duplex channels – an 8 Kbps signaling channel for
supervisory and address signaling, and a 64 Kbps user data channel on a two-wire
access line.
Resolution bandwidth (RBW): RBW is the width of the resolution bandwidth filter in
a spectrum analyzer at some level (usually 3 dB) below the minimum insertion loss
point (maximum deflection point on the display). The RBW is usually set by the last
intermediate frequency filter. The RBW filter may be analog or digital.
Ringdown private line interface: The point of connection between ringdown voice
band private line service and terminal equipment or systems that provide ringing (20 or
30 Hz) in either direction for alerting only. All tip and ring leads are treated as
telephone connections for the purposes of fulfilling approval conditions. On two-wire
circuits the ringing voltage is applied to the ring conductor with the tip conductor
grounded. On four-wire circuits, simplex signaling is used to apply the ringing voltage
7
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
to the tip and ring conductors, and ground to the tip-1 and ring-1 conductors.
Simplex signaling: Signaling in which two conductors are used for a single channel,
and a center-tapped coil or equivalent is used to split the signaling current equally
between the two conductors.
Single-frequency (SF) signaling: A type of wireline carrier or private network
signaling in which dial pulses or supervisory signals are conveyed by a single voicefrequency tone (typically 2600 Hz) in each direction.
Specialty adapters: Adapters that contain passive components such as resistive
pads or bias resistors typically used for connecting data equipment having fixed-loss
loop or programmed data jack network connections to key systems or PBXs.
Stutter dial tone: Interrupted dial tone used to provide an audible signal to the
equipment user in support of certain network features (e.g. voicemail). Typically, the
cadence is 0.1 s on, 0.1 s off and the interruptions are only for the first few seconds of
dial tone.
Stutter dial tone detection device: Terminal equipment that is designed to
automatically go off-hook and determine the presence or absence of stutter dial tone.
Subrate digital service: A digital service providing for the full-time simultaneous twoway transmission of digital signals at synchronous speeds of 2.4, 4.8, 9.6 or 56 Kbps.
Switched circuit data service unit (SCDSU): An SCDSU is terminal equipment with
PSDS functionality, located between the network interface and the data terminal
equipment. It also is sometimes referred to as network channel terminating
equipment.
Symmetric digital subscriber line (SHDSL): The term SHDSL refers to any terminal
equipment having transmitted signal characteristics that meet one or more of the TU-R
PSD masks and associated output power limits defined in 5.4.2.3 of T1.417-2003.
Telephone connection: Connection to telephone network tip and ring leads for twowire and four-wire connections and, additionally, for four-wire telephone connections,
tip-1 and ring-1 leads and all connections derived from these leads. The term
‘‘derived’’ as used here means that the connections are not separated from telephone
tip and ring or from telephone tip-1 and ring-1 by a sufficiently protective barrier.
Provisions of this Standard that apply specifically to telephone network tip and ring
pairs also apply to telephone network tip-1 and ring-1 pairs unless otherwise specified.
In four-wire connections, leads designated tip and ring at the interface are for
transmitting voice frequencies toward the network and leads designated tip-1 and ring1 at the interface are for receiving voice frequencies from the network.
Telephone network: The public switched network and those private lines which are
defined in the scope of this Standard.
Terminal equipment (TE): Communications equipment located on customer
premises at the end of a communications link, used to permit the stations involved to
accomplish the provision of telecommunications or information services.
Terminal port: An equipment port of approved protective circuitry which port faces
remotely-located terminal equipment.
Test equipment: Equipment connected at the customer’s premises and is used on
the customer’s side of the network interfaces to measure characteristics of the
telephone network, or to detect and isolate a communications fault between a terminal
8
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
equipment entity and the telephone network. Approval is required for test equipment
capable of functioning as portable traffic recorded or equipment capable of transmitting
or receiving test tones; except approval is not required for devices used by telephone
companies solely for network installation and maintenance activities such as hand-held
data terminals, linesmen’s handsets, and subscriber line diagnostic devices.
Tie trunk transmission interfaces:
a) Two-wire: A two-wire transmission interface with a path that is essentially
lossless (except for 2-dB switched pad operation, or equivalent) between the
interface and the two-wire or four-wire, transmission reference point of the
terminal equipment.
b) Four-wire lossless: A four-wire transmission interface with a path that is
essentially lossless (except for 2 dB switched pad operation, or equivalent)
between the interface and the two-wire or four-wire transmission reference point
of the terminal equipment; and
c) Direct digital interface: An interface between a digital PBX and a digital
transmission facility.
d) Digital tandem four-wire interface is an interface between digital terminal
equipment and a digital transmission facility operating at 1.544 Mbps or subrate
connecting terminal equipment that provide tandem connections.
e) Digital satellite four-wire interface: A four-wire digital interface between digital
terminal equipment and a digital transmission facility operating at 1.544 Mbps or
subrate connecting terminal equipment that does not provide tandem
connections to other digital terminal equipment.
Transverse balance: A measure of the equality of impedances from network
connections to earth ground. Transverse balance is a measure of assurance that
differential signals ("metallic") are not converted to common-mode signals
("longitudinal") which can cause crosstalk in telecom cables.
The transverse balancem-l coefficient is expressed as:
Balancem l = 20 log10 [VM / VL]
Where:

VL is the longitudinal voltage produced across a longitudinal termination RL

VM is the metallic voltage produced across tip and ring or tip-1 and ring-1 of the
input port when a voltage in the applicable frequency range is applied at all
values of DC loop current that the port under test is capable of drawing when
attached to the appropriate loop from a balanced source with a metallic
impedance RM, and where RM, RL, VM, and VL are defined for each type of
interface.
Very High Speed digital subscriber line modem: A modem having transmitting
signal characteristics meeting the spectral response and aggregate power level
limitations of this Standard and the conformance criteria in ITU-T G.993.1 and ITU-T
G.993.2. The term shall be interpreted to include variations such as VDSL and VDSL2.
Voice band: For the purpose of this Standard, the voice band for analog interfaces is
the frequency band from 200 Hz to 3995 Hz.
9
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Voice band metallic private line channel interface: The point of connection
between a voice band metallic private line channel and terminal equipment or systems
where the network does not provide any signaling or transmission enhancement.
Approved terminal equipment or systems may use convenient signaling methods so
long as the signals are provided in such a manner that they cannot interfere with
adjacent network channels. All tip and ring leads are treated as telephone connections
for the purpose of fulfilling approval conditions.
Zero level decoder: A decoder that (1) complies with the pulse code modulation
encoding µ-law specified in ITU-T G.711, (2) yields a 1000 Hz sine wave at a level of 0
dBm at its voice frequency output port when the periodic sequence of digital signals in
Table 6 of ITU-T G.711 is applied to the decoder input, and (3) provides 1000 Hz
output signal levels that track with 1000 Hz input signal levels as described in clause
4.5.
1.544 Mbps digital CO four-wire interface: A four-wire digital interface between
digital terminal equipment and a digital transmission facility operating at 1.544 Mbps
connecting to a serving central office.
1.544 Mbps digital service: A full-time dedicated private line circuit used for the
transmission of digital signals at a speed of 1.544 Mbps.
3.2
ACRONYMS & ABBREVIATIONS
ADSL: Asymmetric digital subscriber line
ADSL2: 2nd generation ADSL
ADSL2+: Enhanced ADSL2
ADLU: ADSL distribution line unit
BRI: Basic rate interface
DID: Direct inward dialing
DSL: Digital subscriber line
ESHDSL: Extended single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line
EU: Extended upstream
HDSL: High bit rate digital subscriber line
HDSL2: Second generation high bit rate digital subscriber line
HDSL4: Four-wire second generation high bit rate digital subscriber line
IDSL: Integrated digital subscriber line
POTS: Plain old telephone service
PRI: Primary rate interface
PSD: Power spectral density
PSDS: Public switched digital service
RBW: Resolution bandwidth (see definition for elaboration)
10
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
READSL2: Reach extended ADSL2
SDSL: Symmetric digital subscriber line.
SF: Single frequency (see definition for elaboration)
SHDSL: Single-pair high-speed digital subscriber line
SMC: Spectrum management class
STU-R: SHDSL transceiver unit - remote terminal
STU-R: SHDSL transceiver unit at the remote (customer premises) terminal end. See
also “TU-R” below.
TU-R: Transceiver unit – remote terminal (customer premises) terminal end.
VDSL: Very high speed digital subscriber line
VDSL2: Second generation very high speed digital subscriber line
11
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
4 COMMON REQUIREMENTS
4.1
ENVIRONMENTAL SIMULATION
Unpackaged approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry shall comply
with all the criteria specified in this Standard, both prior to and after application of the
mechanical and electrical stresses specified in this section.
4.1.1
Mechanical shock:
4.1.1.1
Hand-held items normally used at head height: 18 random drops from a height of
1.5 meters onto concrete covered with 3 mm asphalt tile or similar surface.
4.1.1.2
Table (desk)-top equipment 0–5 kg: Six random drops from a height of 750 mm
onto concrete covered with 3 mm asphalt tile or similar surface.
4.1.1.3
The drop tests specified in 4.1.1 shall be performed as follows: The unit shall be
positioned prior to release to ensure as nearly as possible that for every six drops
there is one impact on each of the major surfaces and that the surface to be
struck is approximately parallel to the impact surface.
4.1.2
Telephone line surge – Type A:
4.1.2.1
Metallic: Two metallic voltage surges (one of each polarity) shall be applied
between any pair of connections on which lightning surges may occur; this
includes:
a) tip to ring;
b) tip-1 to ring-1; and
c) For a four-wire connection that uses simplex signaling, tip to ring-1 and ring to
tip-1.
4.1.2.1.1
The surge shall have an open circuit voltage waveform in accordance with figure
4.2 having a front time (tf) of 6 µs minimum to 10 µs maximum, and a decay time
(td) of 560 µs minimum to 860 µs maximum. It shall have a short circuit current
wave shape in accordance with figure 4.3 having a front time (tf) of 5 µs
minimum to 10 µs maximum, and a decay time (td) of 560 µs minimum to 760 µs
maximum. The peak voltage shall be 800 V minimum to 880 V maximum, and
the peak short circuit current shall be 100 A minimum to 115 A maximum.
4.1.2.1.2
Surges shall be applied as follows:
a) With the equipment in all states that can affect compliance with the requirements
of this Standard. If an equipment state cannot be achieved by normal means of
power, it shall be achieved artificially;
b) With equipment leads not being surged (including telephone connections,
12
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
auxiliary leads, and terminals for connection to non-approved equipment)
terminated in a manner that occurs in normal use;
c) Under reasonably foreseeable disconnection of primary power sources, with
primary power cords plugged and unplugged, if so configured.
4.1.2.2
Longitudinal: Two longitudinal voltage surges (one of each polarity) shall be
applied to any pair of connections on which lightning surges may occur. This
includes the tip-ring pair and the tip-1—ring-1 pair, to earth grounding
connections, and to all leads intended for connection to non-approved equipment,
connected together. Surges shall be applied as follows:
a) With the equipment in all states that can affect compliance with the requirements
of this Standard. If an equipment state cannot be achieved by normal means of
power, it shall be achieved artificially;
b) With equipment leads not being surged (including telephone connections,
auxiliary leads, and terminals for connection to non-approved equipment)
terminated in a manner that occurs in normal use;
c) Under reasonably foreseeable disconnection of primary power sources, as for
example, with primary power cords plugged and unplugged.
4.1.2.2.1
4.1.2.3
The surge shall have an open circuit voltage waveform in accordance with figure
4.2 with a front time (tf) of 6 µs minimum to 10 µs maximum, and a decay time
(td) of 160 µs minimum to 260 µs maximum. It shall have a short circuit current
wave shape in accordance with figure 4.3 having a front time (tf) of 5 µs
minimum to 10 µs maximum, and a decay time (td) of 160 µs minimum to 210 µs
maximum. The peak voltage shall be 1500 V minimum to 1650 V maximum,
and the peak short circuit current shall be 200 A minimum to 230 A maximum.
Failure modes resulting from application of Type A telephone line surges:
Regardless of operating state, equipment and circuitry are allowed to be in
violation of the transverse balance requirements of section 5 and, for terminal
equipment connected to local area data channels, the longitudinal signal power
requirements of subclause 5.2.1, if:
a) Such failure results from an intentional, designed failure mode that has the effect
of connecting telephone or auxiliary connections with earth ground; and,
b) If such a failure mode state is reached, the equipment is designed so that it
would become substantially and noticeably unusable by the user, or an indication
is given (e.g., an alarm), in order that such equipment can be immediately
disconnected or repaired.
The objective of (a) is to allow for safety circuitry to either open-circuit, which would
cause a permanent on-hook condition, or to short-circuit to ground, as a result of an
energetic lightning surge. Off-hook tests would be unwarranted if the off-hook state
cannot be achieved. A short to ground has the potential for causing interference
resulting from longitudinal imbalance, and therefore designs shall be adopted which
will cause the equipment either to be disconnected or repaired rapidly after such a
state is reached, should it occur in service.
13
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
4.1.3
4.1.3.1
Telephone line surge – Type B:
Metallic: Two metallic voltage surges (one of each polarity) shall be applied to
equipment between any pair of connections on which lightning surges may occur;
this includes:
a) tip to ring;
b) tip-1 to ring-1; and
c) for a four-wire connection that uses simplex signaling, tip to ring-1 and ring to tip1.
The surge shall have an open circuit voltage waveform in accordance with figure
4.2 having a front time (tf) of 9 µs  2.7 µs and a decay time (td) of 720 µs ± 144 µs
and shall have a short circuit current wave shape in accordance with figure 4.3
having a front time (tf) of 5 µs  1.5 µs and a decay time (td) of 320 µs ± 64 µs. The
peak voltage shall be at least 1000 V minimum to 1100 V maximum, and the peak
short circuit current shall be at least 25 A minimum to 27.5 A maximum. The wave
shapes are based on the use of ideal components in figure 4.1 with S2 in position
M. Surges shall be applied:
a) With the equipment in all states that can affect compliance with the requirements
of this Standard. If an equipment state cannot be achieved by normal means of
power, it shall be achieved artificially.
b) With equipment leads not being surged (including telephone connections,
auxiliary leads, and terminals for connection to non-approved equipment)
terminated in a manner that occurs in normal use.
c) Under reasonably foreseeable disconnection of primary power sources, as for
example, with primary power cords plugged and unplugged.
4.1.3.2
Longitudinal: Two longitudinal voltage surges (one of each polarity) shall be
applied to any pair of connections on which lightning surges may occur. This
includes the tip-ring pair and the tip-1 ring-1 pair to earth grounding connections
and to all leads intended for connection to non-approved equipment, connected
together. Surges shall be applied as follows:
a) With the equipment in all states that can affect compliance with the requirements
of this Standard. If an equipment state cannot be achieved by normal means of
power, it shall be achieved artificially.
b) With equipment leads not being surged (including telephone connections,
auxiliary leads, and terminals for connection to non-approved equipment)
terminated in a manner that occurs in normal use.
c) Under reasonably foreseeable disconnection of primary power sources, as for
example with primary power cords plugged and unplugged.
For each output lead of the surge generator, with the other lead open, the surge
shall have an open circuit voltage waveform in accordance with figure 4.2 having a
front time (tf) of 9 µs ± 2.7 µs and a decay time (td) of 720 µs ± 144 µs and shall
have a short circuit current wave shape in accordance with figure 4.3 having a front
time (tf) of 5 µs ± 1.5 µs and a decay time (td) of 320 µs ± 64 µs. The peak voltage
shall be 1500 V minimum to 1650 V maximum, and the peak short circuit current
14
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
shall be 37.5 A minimum to 41.3 A maximum. The wave shapes are based on the
use of ideal components in figure 4.1 with S2 in position L.
4.1.3.3
Failure modes resulting from application of type B telephone line surges:
Approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry shall withstand the
energy of type B surge without causing permanent opening or shorting of the
interface circuit and without sustaining damage that will affect compliance with
this Standard.
R3 = 25 W
Vout
R2 = 15 W
S1
R4 = 25 W
R1 = 50 W
C1 = 20 µF
C2 = 0.2 µF
L
RING
Equipment
Under Test
TIP
M S2
Figure 4.1 – Simplified surge generator
V / Vmax
1.0
T = time from 30% to 90% of peak voltage
Rise time = 1.67 x T = T r µs
Decay time = time from virtual origin to 50 % of
peak voltage on trailing edge
= Td µs
0.9
Td
0.5
0.3
0
T
Tr
Figure 4.2 – Open-circuit voltage wave shape, Tr / Td
15
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
I / Imax
1.0
T = time from 10 % to 90 % of peak current
0.9
Rise time = 1.25 x T = T r µs
Td
0.5
Decay time = time from virtual origin to 50 % of
peak current on trailing edge
= Td µs
0.1
0
T
Tr
Figure 4.3 – Short-circuit current wave shape, Tr / Td
4.1.4
Power line surge:
4.1.4.1
Six power line surges (three of each polarity) shall be applied between the phase
and neutral terminals of the AC power line while the equipment is being powered.
The surge shall have an open circuit voltage waveform in accordance with figure
4.2 having a front time (tf) of 1 µs minimum to 2 µs maximum, and a decay time
(td) of 10 µs minimum to 19 µs maximum, and shall have a short circuit current
wave shape in accordance with figure 4.3 with a front time (tf) of 1 µs minimum to
2 µs maximum, and a decay time (td) of 10 µs minimum to 19 µs maximum. The
peak voltage shall be 2500 V minimum to 2750 V maximum, and the peak short
circuit current shall be 1000 A minimum to 1250 A maximum. Surges shall be
applied:
4.1.4.1.1
With the equipment in all states that can affect compliance with the requirements
of this Standard. If an equipment state cannot be achieved by normal means of
power, it may be achieved artificially.
4.1.4.1.2
With equipment leads not being surged (including telephone connections,
auxiliary leads, and terminals for connection to non-approved/non-certified
equipment) terminated in a manner that occurs in normal use.
4.1.4.2
Failure modes resulting from application of power line surge. Approved terminal
equipment and approved protective circuitry shall comply with all the criteria in
this Standard, both prior to and after the application of the power line surge
specified in 4.1.4, notwithstanding that this surge may result in partial or total
destruction of the equipment under test.
16
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
4.2
LEAKAGE CURRENT LIMITATIONS
Leakage current shall not exceed 10 mA peak at any time during the 90 second test interval
described below when the 50-60 Hz AC test voltage in table 4.1 is applied between the test
points in table 4.1. The 10 mA peak maximum leakage current limitation may be increased
as described in 4.2.6 to accommodate cable capacitance associated with multi-unit
equipment.
4.2.1
Test interval:
The 90 second leakage current test interval shall consist of a 30 second time period
during which the test voltage applied between the points in table 4.1 is gradually
increased from zero to the maximum value listed in table 4.1 followed immediately by
a 60-second time period during which the test voltage is maintained at the value
listed in table 4.1.
4.2.2
Equipment states:
Equipment states necessary for compliance with the requirements of this section,
which cannot be achieved by normal means of power, shall be achieved artificially by
appropriate means.
4.2.3
Treatment of filters and use of alternative voltage:
Filter paths, such as capacitors used in EMI filters, are left in place during leakage
current testing, since these components can be a path for excessive leakage.
4.2.4
Removal in intentional DC path to ground used for protection purposes:
A telephone connection, power lead, auxiliary lead, or E&M lead that has an
intentional DC conducting path to earth ground for protection purposes at the
leakage current test voltage (such as through a surge suppressor), may have the
component providing the conducting path removed from the equipment for the
leakage current test in that operational state. Components removed for this reason
shall comply with the requirements of 4.3.5.2.
4.2.5
Exclusion for intentional DC conducting path to ground:
A telephone connection, auxiliary lead, or E&M lead that has an intentional DC
conducting path to earth ground at operational voltages (such as a ground-start
lead), may be excluded from the leakage current requirement in that operational
state. The tip-ground state of loop-start central-office-implemented telephones is
another example of a lead that may be excluded. Leads excluded for this reason
shall comply with the requirements of 4.3.5.1.
4.2.6
Multiple unit equipment interconnected by cables:
For multi-unit equipment interconnected by cables evaluated and approved as an
interconnected combination or assembly, the specified 10 mA peak maximum
leakage current limitation (other than between power connection points and other
points) may be increased as described here to accommodate cable capacitance.
The leakage current limitation may be increased to (10N+0.13L) mA peak, where L is
the length of the interconnecting cable in the leakage path in meters and N is the
17
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
number of equipment units that the combination or assembly will place in parallel
across a telephone connection.
Table 4.1 – Voltage applied for various combinations of electrical connections.
Voltage source connected between
VAC rms*
(a) and (b)
(a) and (c)
(a) and (d)
(a) and (e)
(a) and (f)
(a) and (g)
(b) and (c)
(b) and (d)
(b) and (e)
(b) and (f)
(b) and (g)
(c) and (e)
(c) and (f)
(d) and (e)
(d) and (f)
(e) and (f)
1500
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
1000
1000
1000
1000
1000
Where:
(a) All telephone connections;
(b) All power connections;
(c) All possible combinations of exposed conductive
surfaces on the exterior of such equipment or circuitry
including grounding connection points, but excluding
terminals for connection to other terminal equipment;
(d) All terminals for connection to approved protective
circuitry or non-approved equipment;
(e) All auxiliary lead terminals;
(f) All E&M lead terminals, and
(g) All PR, PC, CY1 and CY2 leads.
*NOTE – ”VAC rms” shown above are the values to which the test voltage is gradually
increased (see 4.2.1).
18
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
4.3
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE LIMITATIONS
4.3.1
General:
Under no condition of failure of approved terminal equipment or approved protective
circuitry that can be conceived to occur in the handling, operation or repair of such
equipment or circuitry, shall the open circuit voltage on telephone connections
exceed 70 VP after one second, except for voltages for network control signaling,
alerting and supervision.
4.3.2
Connection of non-approved equipment to approved terminal equipment or
approved protective circuitry:
Leads to, or any elements having a conducting path to telephone connections,
auxiliary leads or E&M leads shall:
a) Be reasonably physically separated and restrained from and be neither routed in
the same cable as nor use the same connector as leads or metallic paths
connecting power connections;
b) Be reasonably physically separated and restrained from and be neither routed in
the same cable as nor use adjacent pins on the same connector as metallic
paths that lead to non-approved equipment, when the voltages on such metallic
paths exceed the non-hazardous voltage source limits in 4.3.3.
4.3.3
Non-hazardous voltage source:
For the purposes of this Standard and the limitations on electrical signals applied to
system premises wiring in 47CFR 68.215(d)(5), a voltage source shall be considered
a non-hazardous voltage source if it conforms with the requirements of sections 4.1,
4.2 and 4.3.2, with all connections to the source other than primary power
connections treated as ‘‘telephone connections,’’ and if such source supplies
voltages no greater than the following under all modes of operation and of failure:
a) AC voltages less than 42.4 VP;
b) DC voltages less than 60 V; and
c) Combined AC and DC voltages between any conductor and ground are less
than 42.4 VP when the absolute value of the DC component is less than 21.2
V, and less than (32.8 + 0.454 x VDC) when the absolute value of the DC
component is between 21.2 and 60 V.
4.3.4
4.3.4.1
Intentional paths to ground (as required by clause 4.1):
Connections with operational paths to ground: Approved terminal equipment and
approved protective circuitry having an intentional DC conducting path to earth
ground at operational voltages that was excluded during the leakage current test
of clause 4.2 shall have a DC current source applied between the following points:
a) Telephone connections, including tip, ring, tip-1, ring-1, E&M leads and
auxiliary leads
b) Earth grounding connections
19
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
For each test point, the current shall be gradually increased from zero to 1 A, then
maintained for one minute. The voltage between (a) and (b) shall not exceed 0.1
V at any time. In the event there is a component or circuit in the path to ground,
the requirement shall be met between the grounded side of the component or
circuit and the earth grounding connection.
4.3.4.2
Connections with protection paths to ground. Approved terminal equipment and
protective circuitry having an intentional DC conducting path to earth ground for
protection purposes at the leakage current test voltage that was removed during
the leakage current test of clause 4.2 shall, upon its replacement, have a 50 or 60
Hz voltage source applied between the following points:
a) Connections used for simplex signaling including tip and ring, tip-1 and ring-1,
E&M leads and auxiliary leads, and;
b) Earth grounding connections.
The voltage shall be gradually increased from zero to 120 V rms for approved
terminal equipment, or 300 V rms for protective circuitry, then maintained for one
minute. The current between (a) and (b) shall not exceed 10 mAP at any time. As
an alternative to carrying out this test on the complete equipment or device, the
test may be carried out separately on components, subassemblies, and simulated
circuits, outside the unit, provided that the test results would be representative of
the results of testing the complete unit.
20
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
4.4
BILLING PROTECTION
4.4.1
Call duration requirements on data equipment:
For data equipment connected to the public switched network, or to tie trunks, or to
private lines that access the public switched network, approved data terminal
equipment and approved protective circuitry shall comply with the following
requirements when answering an incoming call, except in off-hook states in which
the signals are transmitted and/or received by electro-acoustic transducers only.
This is applicable to approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry
employed with digital services where such digital services are interconnected with
the analog telephone network.
4.4.1.1
Approved protective circuitry connected to associated data equipment shall
assure that the following signal power limitations are met for at least the first 2
seconds after the off-hook condition is presented to the telephone network in
response to an incoming call:
4.4.1.1.1
The total power of signals that appear at the protective circuitry/telephone
network interface for delivery to the telephone network, when measured with the
appropriate loop simulator circuit or a 600 ohm termination shall be limited to -55
dBm within the voice band ; and
4.4.1.1.2
Signals that appear at the protective circuitry-associated data equipment
interface for delivery to associated data equipment shall be limited as follows: for
any received signal power (appearing at the protective circuitry-telephone
network interface) up to 0 dBm (within the voice band), the power of signals
delivered to associated data equipment shall be no greater than the signal
power that would be delivered as a result of received signal power of -55 dBm.
4.4.1.2
Approved terminal equipment for data applications shall assure that, when an
incoming telephone call is answered, the answering terminal equipment prevents
both transmission and reception of data for at least the first two seconds after the
answering terminal equipment transfers to the off-hook condition. For the
purpose of this requirement, a fixed sequence of signals that is transmitted (and
originated within) and/or received by the approved terminal equipment each time
it answers an incoming call shall not be considered data, provided that such
signals are for one or more of the following purposes:
a) Disabling echo control devices,
b) Adjusting automatic equalizers and gain controls,
c) Establishing synchronization, or
d) Signaling the presence and if required, the mode of operation, of the data
terminal at the remote end of a connection.
21
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
4.4.2
Voice and data equipment on-hook signal requirements:
For approved voice and data equipment connected to the public switched network, or
to tie trunks, or to private lines that access the public switched network, approved
protective circuitry and approved terminal equipment shall comply with the following
on-hook signal requirements:
4.4.2.1
The total power delivered into a two-wire loop simulator circuit or into the transmit
and receive pairs of a four-wire loop simulator or into a 600 ohms termination
(where appropriate) in the on-hook state by analog voice-band equipment shall
not exceed -55 dBm within the voice band. Approved protective circuitry shall
also assure that for any input level up to 10 dB above the overload point, the
power to a two-wire loop simulator circuit or the transmit and receive pairs of a
four-wire loop simulator circuit or into a 600 ohms termination (where appropriate)
does not exceed the above limits.
4.4.2.2
The total power delivered into a two-wire loop simulator circuit or into the transmit
and receive pairs of a four-wire loop simulator circuit, in the on-hook state, by
reverse battery equipment shall not exceed -55 dBm within the voice band, unless
the equipment is arranged to inhibit in-coming signals.
4.4.2.3
On-hook requirements for approved subrate and 1.544Mbps digital terminal
equipment - Approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry shall
comply with the following:
4.4.2.3.1
The total power derived within the voice band by a zero level decoder
conforming to the requirements of 4.5.2 in the on-hook state shall not exceed 55 dBm.
4.4.2.3.2
Approved protective circuitry for digital equipment shall also assure that the
power derived within the voice band by a zero level decoder conforming to the
requirements of 4.5.2 does not exceed the limits in 4.4.2.3.1 for any input level
up to 10 dB above the overload point.
4.4.2.3.3
Reverse battery subrate channel: The total power derived within the voice band
by a zero level decoder conforming to the requirements of 4.5.2, in the on-hook
state, shall not exceed -55 dBm, unless the equipment is arranged to inhibit
incoming signals.
4.4.3
Signaling interference requirements:
4.4.3.1
The signal power delivered to the network interface by the approved terminal
equipment and from signal sources internal to approved protective circuitry in the
2450 Hz to 2750 Hz band shall be less than or equal to the power present
simultaneously in the 800 Hz to 2450 Hz band for the first 2 seconds after going
to the off-hook state.
4.4.3.2
Approved terminal equipment for connection to subrate or 1.544 Mbps digital
services shall not deliver digital signals to the telephone network with equivalent
power in the 2450 to 2750 Hz band as derived by a zero level decoder conforming
22
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
to the requirements of subclause 4.5.2 unless an equal or greater amount of
equivalent power is present in the 800 to 2450 Hz band for the first two seconds
after going to the off-hook state. (See the definition for “equivalent power” in
clause 3.)
4.4.4
Other billing protection requirements:
Additional billing protection requirements for specific interfaces are given in clause 5.
23
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
4.5
ENCODED ANALOG CONTENT
If approved terminal equipment contains an analog-to-digital converter or generates a data
bit stream that is intended for eventual conversion into voice band analog signals in the
PSTN, the encoded analog content of the digital signal shall be limited as specified in 4.5.1.
4.5.1
Encoded analog content limits:
The maximum equivalent power of encoded analog content derived by a zero level
decoder test configuration conforming to the requirements of 4.5.2 shall not exceed
the following limits when averaged over any 3-second time interval using the test
circuit shown in Figure 4.4:
a) -9 dBm for all signals other than live voice, V.90 or V.92 modems, or network
control signals.
b) -6 dBm for V.90 or V.92 modems.
c) -3 dBm for network control signals.
4.5.2
Zero level decoder requirements:
For the purposes of determining compliance to the requirements in this standard, a
zero level decoder shall:
a) Have a digital input interface compatible with the digital interface under test;
b) Comply with the pulse code modulation encoding µ-law specified in ITU-T
G.711;
c) Yield a 1000 Hz sine wave at a level of 0 dBm0 at its voice frequency output
port when the periodic sequence of digital signals in table 6 of ITU-T G.711 is
applied to the decoder input; and,
d) Provide 1000 Hz output signal levels that track with 1000 Hz input signal
levels within +/- 0.25 dB over an input signal level range of +3 to -37 dBm0,
within +/- 0.5 dB over an input signal level range of -38 to -50 dBm0, and
within +0.5 to -0.9 dB over an input signal level range of -51 to -60 dBm0.
e) Provide a resistive 600 ohms output impedance and terminate in a resistance
of 600 ohms.
24
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Digital Terminal Equipment
Network Interface
Digital Port(s)
Analog Port(s)
A/D
M
N
A/D
U
C
X
xdBm
T
E
Internal signal sources
DEMUX
Zero
Level
Decoder
xdBm
Figure 4.4 –Test configuration using a zero level decoder
25
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
4.6
CONNECTORS & WIRING CONFIGURATIONS
4.6.1
Introduction:
Connection of terminal equipment to the telephone network shall be made through a
connector conforming to TIA-1096-A or by direct attachment to wiring installed by the
provider(s) of wire line telecommunications including, but not limited to, splicing,
bridging, twisting, and soldering.
Hardware used to mount, protect, and enclose standard jacks is not described in this
Standard or TIA-1096. The only requirement on connecting blocks, housings, dust
covers, outdoor boxes, and the like that contain standard network jacks is that they
shall accept standard plugs with cordage.
4.6.2
Wiring Configurations:
The connectors specified in TIA-1096-A shall be wired in accordance with any of the
applicable wiring configurations provided in T1.TR.5-1999. The applicable connector
and connector wiring configuration for approved TE shall be identified in consumer
instructions and product approval documentation.
4.6.2.1
Universal Service Ordering Code: A universal service ordering code (USOC) is
specified in T1.TR.5-1999 for each wiring configuration. These USOCs are
generic service ordering codes that are used or recognized by most wireline
carriers. If a customer wishes to have the wireline carrier install a jack or wiring
configuration, the appropriate USOC needs to be specified when the customer
requests service installation.
4.6.2.2
Default connector wiring configuration: In the absence of a request for a specific
type of jack and wiring configuration, wireline carriers will typically install a 6position non-keyed jack with the RJ11W (for wall mounted equipment) or RJ11C
(for all other equipment) wiring configuration shown in figure 4.5 below.
1
2
3
R
T
R
T
4
5
6
Jack
to
Network
Plug
from
Customer
Installation
Figure 4.5 – RJ11C/W network interface wiring configuration
26
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
4.6.3
Multi-line, private branch exchange (PBX), and key telephone systems:
Any of the jack configurations specified in 4.6.2, used singly, in multiple
combinations, or combined in common mechanical arrays, may be used as the
interface between multi-line equipment such as PBX and key telephone systems,
and the telephone network. The telephone company and installation supervisor may
mutually agree to use electrical connections alternative to those specified in 4.6.2.
27
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
4.7
ALLOWABLE NET AMPLIFICATION BETWEEN PORTS
4.7.1 General:
The source impedance for all measurements related to the requirements in this clause shall
be 600 ohms. All ports shall be terminated in appropriate loop or private line channel
simulator circuits or 600 ohms terminations.
The allowable net amplification limitations shall be applicable to multiport systems where
channels are not derived by time or frequency compression methods. Terminal equipment
employing such compression techniques shall assure that equivalent compensation for
through gain parameters shall be demonstrated.
4.7.2 Allowable net amplification between network interface ports:
Approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry with provision for
transmission from one network interface port to another network interface port shall have no
adjustments that will allow net amplification to occur in either direction of transmission in the
through-transmission path within the 200–3995 Hz voice band that will exceed the values
shown in table 4.7.1.
Approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry may have net amplification
exceeding the limitations in table 4.7.1 provided that, for each type of network interface port,
the absolute signal power levels specified in clauses 5.1 and 4.5 are not exceeded.
Approved terminal equipment or protective circuitry with the capability for through
transmission from voice band private line channels or voice band metallic channels to other
telephone network interfaces shall ensure that the absolute signal power levels specified in
clauses 5.1 and 4.5, for each telephone network interface type to be connected, are not
exceeded.
4.7.3
Allowable net amplification between ports for other approved TE and network
interface ports:
Approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry with provision for
transmission between ports to other terminal equipment that is separately approved for
direct connection to wireline carrier networks and network interface ports shall have no
adjustments that will allow net amplification to occur in the through-transmission path within
the 200–3995 Hz voice band that will exceed the values shown in table 4.7.2 in the direction
of transmission toward the network.
Approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry may have net amplification
exceeding the limitations of table 4.7.2 provided that, for each network interface type to be
connected, the absolute signal power levels specified in clauses 5.1 and 4.5 are not
exceeded.
28
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
4.7.4 Single frequency (SF) guard band:
The insertion loss in through-connection paths for any frequency in the 800 to 2450 Hz band
shall not exceed the loss at any frequency in the 2450 to 2750 Hz band by more than 1 dB
(maximum loss in the 800 to 2450 Hz band minus minimum loss in the 2450 to 2750 Hz
band plus 1 dB).
4.7.5 SF cut-off:
Approved terminal equipment or approved protective circuitry with the capability for through
transmission from voice band private line channels or voice band metallic channels to other
network interface ports shall ensure, for each type of network interface port to be connected,
that signals with energy in the 2450 to 2750 Hz band shall not be transmitted toward the
network interface port unless there is at least an equal amount of energy in the 800 to 2450
Hz band within 20 ms of signal application.
Table 4.7.1 – Allowable net amplification between network interface ports
Tie Trunk Ports
To
From
(see note 1)
Lossless
(twowire or
fourwire)
Tie trunk
ports
Subrate
1.544
Mbps
satellite
(fourwire)
Subrate
1.544
Mbps
tandem
(fourwire)
Integrated
services
trunk
ports
Off
premises
station
ports
(twowire)
2 dB
2 dB
2 dB
3 dB
3 dB
3 dB
Lossless
(two-wire
or fourwire)
Subrate
1.544
Mbps
satellite
(fourwire)
Subrate
1.544
Mbps
tandem
(fourwire)
0 dB
2 dB
1 dB
Analog
public
switched
network
ports
(two-wire)
-2 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
Integrated services
trunk ports
-2 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
Off-premises station
port (two-wire)
2 dB
4 dB
4 dB
4 dB
4 dB
4 dB
Analog public
switched network
ports (two-wire)
3 dB
3 dB
Subrate 1.544 Mbps
digital PBX-CO trunk
ports (four-wire)
0 dB
Subrate
1.544
Mbps
digital
PBX-CO
trunk
ports
(fourwire)
4 dB
NOTE 1 – The allowable net amplification is the value indicated in the table when moving
from the horizontal table entry toward the vertical table entry.
29
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 4.7.2 – Allowable net amplification between ports for other approved TE and
network interface ports
Tie Trunk Ports
To
Subrate
1.544
Mbps
tandem
(fourwire)
Integrated
services
trunk
ports
Off
premises
station
ports
(twowire)
Analog
public
switched
network
ports
(two-wire)
Subrate
1.544 Mbps
digital
PBX-CO
trunk
ports
(four-wire)
From
(see note 1)
Lossless
(two-wire or
four-wire)
Subrate
1.544
Mbps
satellite
(fourwire)
Port for approved
digital TE
-2 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
On-premises station
port for approved
TE (see note 2)
-2 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
0 dB
NOTE 1 – The allowable net amplification is the value indicated in the table when moving
from the horizontal table entry toward the vertical table entry.
NOTE 2 – These ports are two-wire on-premises station line ports for terminal equipment
that is separately approved.
30
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5 INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS
5.1
ANALOG VOICE BAND INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS
5.1.1
General analog voice band signal power limits:
5.1.1.1
Limits on signal power shall be met at the interface for all two-wire network ports
and, where applicable, to both transmit and receive pairs of all four-wire network
ports.
5.1.1.2
Signal power measurements shall be made using terminations as specified in
each of the following limitations.
5.1.1.3
The transmit and receive pairs for four-wire network ports shall be measured with
the pair not under test connected to a termination equivalent to that specified for
the pair under test.
5.1.2
Limitations on signals not intended for network control signaling:
5.1.2.1
For all interfaces except lossless tie trunk, OPS, or private line interfaces using
ringdown or in-band signaling, the power of all signal energy other than live voice,
in the 200–3995 Hz voice band, delivered by approved terminal equipment or
approved protective circuitry to the appropriate loop simulator – other than nonpermissive data equipment or data protective circuitry – shall not exceed -9 dBm
when averaged over any 3-second interval.
5.1.2.2
For two-wire and four-wire lossless tie trunk type interfaces, the maximum power
of other than live voice signals delivered to a 600 ohm termination shall not
exceed -11 dBm when averaged over any 3-second interval.
5.1.2.3
OPS interfaces: The maximum power of other than live voice delivered to an
OPS line simulator circuit shall not exceed -9 dBm, when averaged over any 3second interval.
5.1.2.4
Approved test equipment or approved test circuitry: The maximum signal power
delivered to a loop simulator circuit shall not exceed 0 dBm when averaged over
any 3-second interval.
5.1.2.5
For voice band private line interfaces using ringdown or in-band signaling, the
maximum power of other than live voice signals delivered to a 600 ohm
termination shall not exceed -13 dBm when averaged over any 3-second interval.
5.1.2.6
For voice band private line interfaces using in-band signaling in the band 2600
31
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
, the maximum power delivered to a 600 ohm termination shall not
exceed -8 dBm during the signaling mode. The maximum power delivered to a
600 ohm termination in the on-hook steady state supervisory condition shall not
exceed -20 dBm. The maximum power of other than live voice signals delivered
to a 600 ohm termination during the non-signaling mode and for other in-band
systems shall not exceed -13 dBm when averaged over any 3-second interval.
5.1.3
5.1.3.1
Limitations on internal signal sources primarily intended for network control
signaling:
For all operating conditions except tie trunk applications, the maximum power in
the frequency band below 3995 Hz delivered to a loop simulator circuit shall not
exceed the following when averaged over any 3-second interval:
a) 0 dBm when used for network control (for example, DTMF and coin
control signals);
b) 0 dBm when DTMF is used for manual entry end-to-end signaling. When
the device is used for this purpose it shall not generate more than 40
DTMF digits per manual key stroke;
c) -9 dBm in all other cases.
5.1.3.2
For tie trunk applications, the maximum power delivered to a 600 ohm termination
for approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry under all
operating conditions shall not exceed -4 dBm over any 3-second interval.
5.1.4
Limitations at the interface from non-approved external signal sources:
For approved terminal equipment or approved protective circuitry with non-approved
signal source input, such as music on hold, the voice band metallic signal power
requirements in 5.1.1 of this Standard shall be met using an input signal with a
frequency range of 200 Hz to 4000 Hz with a level 10 dB higher than the overload
point.
5.1.5
Through transmission limitations:
5.1.5.1
DC conditions: Where terminal equipment or protective circuitry with provision for
through-transmission from other terminal equipment, excluding data equipment
and data protective circuitry that are approved in accordance with 5.1.5.3,
provides a DC electrical signal to equipment connected therewith (for example,
powering of electro-acoustic transducers), the DC conditions shall meet the
requirements below unless the combination of the through-transmission
equipment and equipment connected therewith is approved as a combination
which conforms to subclauses 5.1.2 and 5.1.3.
a) The open circuit voltage shall not exceed 56.5 V.
b) The short circuit current shall not exceed 140 mA.
c) The current provided into 430 ohms, or into the maximum external resistive
32
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
load supported by the equipment if greater, shall be at least 20 mA.
5.1.5.2
Data terminal equipment jack limitations: Through-transmission equipment to
which remotely connected data terminal equipment may be connected shall not
be equipped with or connected to either a universal or programmed data jack
used in data configurations (see 5.1.5.3).
5.1.5.3
Data terminal equipment: Approved data circuit terminal equipment shall be
capable of operation in at least one of the states discussed in the lettered list
below. The output power level of the data circuit terminal equipment shall not be
alterable, by the customer, to levels that exceed the signal power limits specified
herein.
a) Data circuit terminal equipment intended to operate with a programming
resistor for signal level control shall provide the programmed levels given in
table 5.1 within +/- 1 dB. The voltages impressed on resistor Rp by the data
equipment shall not cause power dissipation in Rp in excess of 50 milliwatts.
FIgure 5.1 shown below was used in calculating values of the programming
resistors and may be useful in implementing the automatic control of signal
power output in the programmed data equipment.
RP
Data
Jack
PC
PR
RS
R1
Vin
R1
Vout
Note: R1 is the source impedance for the input signal Vin, and also the
terminating impedance of the load. RS is a series resistance on which the
computation of the programming resistor Rp is based. The table of values of
Rp is derived for R1=600 ohms and RS=3600 ohms.
Figure 5.1. Data terminal equipment signal power control resistor network.
33
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
b) Data circuit terminal equipment intended to operate in the fixed loss loop (FLL)
state shall not transmit signal power that exceeds -4 dBm, in the 200-3995 Hz
voice band, when averaged over any and all 3-second intervals.
c) Data circuit terminal equipment not operating in accordance with (a) or (b)
above shall not transmit signals from 200 to 3995 Hz that exceed -9 dBm,
when averaged over any and all 3-second intervals.
Table 5.1 – Programming resistors
Programming resistor
RP* (ohms)
Programmed data
equipment signal
power output
Short
0 dBm
150
-1 dBm
336
-2 dBm
569
-3 dBm
866
-4 dBm
1240
-5 dBm
1780
-6 dBm
2520
-7 dBm
3610
-8 dBm
5490
-9 dBm
9200
-10 dBm
19800
-11 dBm
Open
-12 dBm
*NOTE – RP tolerance 1%
5.1.5.4
Allowable net amplification between ports: Approved terminal equipment and
approved protective circuitry with provision for transmission between network
interface ports or between ports to other terminal equipment that is separately
approved and network interface ports shall meet the requirements of clause 4.7.
5.1.5.5
For tie trunk interfaces limitation on idle circuit stability parameters for idle state
operating conditions of approved terminal equipment and approved protective
circuitry, the following limitations shall be met:
a) For the two-wire interface:
34
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
b) For the four-wire lossless interface:
c) The following definitions shall apply to return loss requirements:
1. RL is the return loss of two-wire terminal equipment at the interface with
respect to 600 ohms + 2.16 µF (i.e., Zref = 600 ohms + 2.16 µF).
2. RLi is the terminal equipment input (receive) port return loss with respect
to 600 ohms (i.e., Zref = 600 ohms).
3. RL0 is the terminal equipment output (transmit) port return loss with
respect to 600 ohms (i.e., Zref = 600 ohms).
35
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
4. tl is the transducer loss between the receive and transmit ports of the
four-wire PBX.
5. tlf is the transducer loss in the forward direction from the receive port to
the transmit port of the PBX.
6. Where Ii is the current sent into the receive port and Ir is the current
received at the transmit port terminated at 600 ohms.
7. tlr is the transducer loss in the reverse direction, from the transmit port to
the receive port of the PBX.
8. Where Ii is the current sent into the transmit port and Ir is the current
received at the receive port terminated at 600 ohms. The source
impedance of Ii shall be 600 ohms.
36
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.1.5.6
Signal power in the 3995–4005 Hz frequency band: Power resulting from internal
signal sources contained in approved protective circuitry and approved terminal
equipment (voice and data), not intended for network control signaling: For all
operating conditions of approved terminal equipment and approved protective
circuitry that incorporate signal sources other than sources intended for network
control signaling, the maximum power delivered by such sources in the 3995–
4005 Hz band to an appropriate simulator circuit, shall be 18 dB below maximum
permitted power specified in clause 5.1 for the voice band.
Terminal equipment with provision of through-transmission from other equipment:
The loss in any through-transmission path of approved terminal equipment and
approved protective circuitry at any frequency in the 600 to 4000 Hz band shall
not exceed, by more than 3 dB, the loss at any frequency in the 3995 to 4005 Hz
band, when measured into an appropriate simulator circuit from a source that
appears as 600 ohms across tip and ring.
5.1.5.7
Longitudinal voltage at frequencies below 4 kHz: The weighted rms voltage (see
note) averaged over 100 ms that is resultant of all of the component longitudinal
voltages in the 100 Hz to 4 kHz band after weighting according to the transfer
function of f/4000 where f is the frequency in Hz, shall not exceed the maximum
indicated under the conditions stated in subclause 5.1.5.9.
NOTE – Average magnitudes may be used for signals that have peak-to-rms
ratios of 20 dB and less. The rms limitations shall be used instead of average
values if the peak-to-rms ratio of the interfering signal exceeds this value.
Frequency range
100 Hz to 4 kHz
5.1.5.8
Maximum weighted
rms voltage
-30 dBV
Impedance
500 ohms
For voltage in the 4 kHz to 30 MHz frequency range, general case of two-wire and
four-wire lossless interface (except LADC): Except as noted, rms voltage as
averaged over 100 ms at the telephone connections of approved terminal
equipment and approved protective circuitry in all of the possible 8-kHz bands
within the indicated frequency range and under the conditions specified in 5.1.5.9
shall not exceed the maximum indicated below. For subclauses 5.1.5.8 and
5.1.5.8.3, ‘‘f’’ shall be the center frequency in kHz of each of the possible 8 kHz
bands beginning at 8 kHz.
37
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.1.5.8.1
5.1.5.8.2
Metallic voltage, 4 kHz to 270 kHz:
Center frequency (f)
of 8-kHz band
Max voltage in all
8-kHz bands
Metallic terminating
impedance
8 kHz to 12 kHz
-(6.4 + 12.6 log f) dBV
300 ohms
12 kHz to 90 kHz
(23 – 40 log f) dBV
135 ohms
90 kHz to 266 kHz
-55 dBV
135 ohms
Metallic voltage, 270 kHz to 30 MHz: The rms value of the metallic voltage
components in the frequency range of 270 kHz to 30 MHz shall, averaged over
2 µs, not exceed -15 dBV. This limitation applies with a metallic termination
having an impedance of 135 ohms.
NOTE - A filter between the TE and the network interface may be necessary to
meet this requirement.
5.1.5.8.3
5.1.5.8.4
5.1.5.9
Longitudinal voltage, 4 kHz to 270 kHz:
Center frequency (f)
of 8-kHz band
Max voltage in all
8-kHz bands
Longitudinal terminating
impedance
8 kHz to 12 kHz
-(18.4 + 20 log f) dBV
500 ohms
12 kHz to 42 kHz
(3 – 40 log f) dBV
90 ohms
42 kHz to 266 kHz
-62 dBV
90 ohms
Longitudinal voltage, 270 kHz to 6 MHz: The rms value of the longitudinal
voltage components, in the frequency range of 270 kHz to 6 MHz shall not
exceed -30 dBV with a longitudinal termination having an impedance of 90
ohms.
Requirements in subclauses 5.1.5.7 and 5.1.5.8 shall apply under the following
conditions: All approved terminal equipment, except equipment to be used on
LADC, and all approved protective circuitry, shall comply with the limitations when
connected to a termination equivalent to the circuit depicted in figure 5.2 and
when placed in all operating states of the equipment except during network
control signaling.
38
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
NOTE – All resistor values are in ohms.
Figure 5.2 – Resistive terminations
5.1.5.9.1
All approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry shall comply
with the limitations in the off-hook state over the range of loop currents that
would flow with the equipment connected to an appropriate simulator circuit.
5.1.5.9.2
Approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry with provision for
through-transmission from other equipments shall comply with the limitations
with a 1000 Hz tone applied from a 600 ohms source (or, if appropriate a source
which reflects a 600 ohms impedance across tip and ring) at the maximum level
that would be applied during normal operation. Approved protective circuitry for
data shall also comply with the tone level 10 dB higher than the overload point.
39
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.1.5.9.3
5.1.6
5.1.6.1
For approved terminal equipment or approved protective circuitry with nonapproved signal source input, such as music on hold, the out of band signal
power requirements shall be met using an input signal with a frequency range of
200 Hz to 20 kHz and the level set at the overload point.
Analog voice band transverse balance limits:
Technical description and application:
The transverse balancem-l coefficient is expressed as:
Balance m-l = 20 log10 [VM / VL]
Where VL is the longitudinal voltage produced across a longitudinal termination RL
of 500 ohms and VM is the metallic voltage across the tip-ring or tip-1 and ring-1
interface of the input port when a voltage in the frequency range from 200 Hz to 4
kHz is applied at all values of DC loop current that the port under test is capable of
drawing when attached to the appropriate loop from a balanced source with a
metallic impedance RM = 600 ohms as shown in figure 5.3. The source voltage
shall be set such that VM = 0.775Vrms when a termination of RM is substituted for
the terminal equipment.)
5.1.6.2
The minimum transverse balance coefficient specified in table 5.2 shall be
equaled or exceeded for all two-wire network ports, OPS line ports and the
transmit pair (tip and ring) and receive pair (tip-1 and ring-1) of all four-wire
network ports simulator circuits at all values of DC loop current that the port under
test is capable of drawing when attached to the appropriate loop (see figure 1.4).
An illustrative test circuit that satisfies the above conditions is shown in figure 4.10
for analog. The test circuit shall be balanced to 20 dB greater than the equipment
standard for all frequencies specified (using trimmer capacitors C3 and C4), with
a 600 ohm resistor substituted for the equipment under test. Other means may
be used to determine the specified transverse balance coefficient, provided that
adequate documentation of the appropriateness, precision, and accuracy of the
alternative means is provided.
40
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
T1
C1, C2
C3, C4
Osc
R1
RL
1:1 impedance ratio 600 ohms transformer
8 µF, 400 VDC, matched to within 0.1%
100 to 500 pF adjustable trimmer capacitors
Audio oscillator with source resistance R1 less than or equal to 600 ohms
Selected such that ZOSC + R1 = RM = 600 ohms
500 ohms
NOTE 1 – Connect exposed conductive surfaces on the exterior of the equipment under
test to the ground plane.
NOTE 2 – When the terminal equipment provides for an external connection to ground,
connect the terminal equipment to ground.
NOTE 3 –When the terminal equipment makes no provision for an external ground,
centrally locate the terminal equipment on a conductive ground plane with no additional
ground connection. The ground plane has overall dimensions at least 50% greater than
the corresponding dimensions of the terminal equipment
Figure 5.3 – Illustrative test circuit for transverse balance (analog)
5.1.6.3
The minimum transverse balance requirements specified in 5.1.6.4 shall be
equaled or exceeded under all reasonable conditions of the application of earth
ground to the equipment or protective circuitry under test.
5.1.6.4
Analog voice band equipment: All approved analog voice band equipment shall
be tested in the off-hook state. The minimum transverse balance requirement in
the off-hook state shall be 40 dB, throughout the range of frequencies specified in
table 5.2. For some categories of equipment, transverse balance requirements
also apply to the on-hook state. When both off-hook and on-hook requirements
apply, they shall be:
41
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.2 – Analog longitudinal balance
State
Off-hook
On-hook
On-hook
Frequency
200 Hz  f  4000 Hz
200 Hz  f  1000 Hz
1000 Hz  f  4000 Hz
Balance
40 dB
60 dB
40 dB
5.1.6.4.1
For analog one-port two-wire terminal equipment with loop-start, ringdown, or inband signaling or for voice band metallic channel applications, both off-hook and
on-hook requirements shall apply. The tip-ground state of loop-start central
office implemented telephones is excluded from this requirement.
5.1.6.4.2
For analog one port equipment with ground-start and reverse-battery signaling
only off-hook requirements shall apply.
5.1.6.4.3
For analog approved protective circuitry for two-wire applications with loop-start,
ringdown, or in-band signaling, or for voice band metallic channel applications,
both off-hook and on-hook requirements shall apply. Criteria shall be met with
either terminal of the interface to other equipment connected to earth ground.
The interface to other equipment shall be terminated in an impedance reflected
to the telephone connection as 600 ohms in the off-hook state of the approved
protective circuit, and the interface shall not be terminated in the on-hook state.
The arrangement of figure 4.15 shall be used where the impedance Z shall be
selected so that the reflected impedance at tip and ring is 600 ohms.
42
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Interface to nonapproved equipment
TIP
Balance
Test
Apparatus
Approved
Protective
Circuitary
Z
RING
Ground plane
Figure 4.15 – Required termination for connections to non-approved equipment
5.1.6.4.4
For analog approved protective circuitry with ground-start and reverse-battery
signaling only off-hook requirements shall apply. Criteria shall be met with either
terminal of the interface to other equipment connected to earth ground. The
interface to other equipment shall be terminated in an impedance reflected to
the telephone connection as 600 ohms in the off-hook state of the approved
protective circuit. The arrangement of figure 4.15 shall be used.
5.1.6.4.5
For analog multi-port equipment with loop-start signaling both off-hook and onhook requirements shall apply. Criteria shall be satisfied for all ports when all
the ports not under test are terminated in their appropriate networks, as will be
identified below, and when interface connections other than the ports are
terminated in circuits appropriate to that interface. The minimum transverse
balance coefficients shall also be satisfied for all values of DC loop current that
the approved equipment is capable of drawing through each of its ports when
these ports are attached to the loop simulator circuit specified in this Standard.
The termination for all ports other than the particular one whose transverse
balance coefficient is being measured shall have a metallic impedance of 600
ohms and a longitudinal impedance of 500 ohms. Figure 4.12 shows this
termination.
5.1.6.4.6
For analog multi-port equipment with ground-start and reverse-battery signaling,
43
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
only off-hook requirements shall apply. Criteria shall be satisfied for all ports
when all ports not under test are terminated in their appropriate networks as will
be identified below, and when interface connections other than the ports are
terminated in circuits appropriate to that interface. The minimum transverse
balance coefficients shall be satisfied for all values of DC loop current that the
approved equipment is capable of drawing through each of its ports when these
ports are attached to the loop simulator circuit specified in this Standard. The
terminations for all ports other than the particular one whose transverse balance
coefficient is being measured shall have a metallic impedance of 600 ohms and
a longitudinal impedance of 500 ohms. Figure 4.12 shows this termination.
5.1.6.4.7
5.1.6.4.7.1
For analog approved terminal equipment and protective circuitry for four-wire
network ports, both the off-hook and on-hook requirements shall apply. The
pairs not under test shall be terminated in a metallic impedance of 600 ohms.
Other conditions are as follows:
For analog approved protective circuitry with loop-start, ground-start, reverse
battery, ringdown, or in-band signaling; or for voice band metallic channel
applications, criteria shall be met with either terminal of the interface to other
equipment connected to earth ground. The interface to other equipment shall
be terminated in an impedance that will result in 600 ohms at each of the
transmit and receive pairs of the four-wire telephone connection in the off-hook
state of the approved protective circuit, and the interface shall not be
terminated in the on-hook state. The arrangement of figure 4.13 shall be used,
where the termination impedance Z shall be selected so that the reflected
impedance at tip-1 and ring-1 is 600 ohms.
44
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Interface to nonapproved equipment
TIP
Circuit
of
Figure 4.9
Transmit
RING
Approved
Protective
Circuitary
Z
TIP 1
Balance
Test
Apparatus
Receive
RING 1
Ground plane
NOTE – Configuration shown is for measurement-of receive pair
Figure 4.13 – Required termination for connections to non-approved equipment
5.1.6.4.7.2
5.1.6.4.8
For analog multi-port equipment with loop start, ground start, and reverse
battery, ringdown, or in-band signaling, or for voice band metallic channel
applications: Criteria shall be satisfied for all network ports when all the ports
not under test are terminated as defined below, and when interface
connections other than the network ports are terminated in circuits appropriate
to the interface. The criteria shall also be satisfied for all values of DC loop
current that the approved equipment is capable of drawing through each port
when the port is connected to the appropriate four-wire loop simulator circuit.
The terminations for both pairs of all network ports not under test shall have a
metallic impedance of 600 ohms and a longitudinal impedance of 500 ohms.
Figure 4.12 shows this termination.
For analog PBX equipment (or similar systems) with class B or class C offpremises interfaces, only off-hook requirements shall apply. Criteria shall be
satisfied for all off-premises station interface ports when these ports are
terminated in their appropriate networks for their off-hook state, and when all
other interface connections are terminated in circuits appropriate to that
interface. The minimum transverse balance coefficients shall also be satisfied
for all values of DC loop current that the approved PBX is capable of providing
45
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
through off-premises station ports when these ports are attached to the offpremises line simulator circuit specified in this Standard.
5.1.7
Loop start interfaces:
5.1.7.1
General: Requirements in this section shall apply to the tip and ring conductors of
two-wire and four-wire loop start interfaces in the following configuration:
5.1.7.1.1
The tip and ring conductors shall be connected together and treated as one of
the conductors of a tip and ring pair.
5.1.7.1.2
The tip-1 and ring-1 conductors shall be connected together and treated as the
other conductor of a tip and ring pair.
5.1.7.1.3
Figure 1.1 shows a loop simulator for 2-wire loop-start interfaces that is
referenced for several requirements in clauses 4.4 and 5.1.
Means shall be used to generate, at the point of tip and ring connections to the
terminal equipment or protective circuitry, the parameters of DC line current and
AC impedance that are generated by the illustrative circuit shown in figure 1.1.
The required circuit schematics are shown in figure 1.1 for a two-wire loop start
interface. Other implementations may be used provided that the same DC
voltage and current characteristics and AC impedance characteristics will be
presented to the equipment under test as are presented in the illustrative
schematic diagrams. When used, the simulator shall be operated over the
entire range of loop resistance as indicated in the figures, and with the indicated
polarities and voltage limits. Whenever loop current is changed, sufficient time
shall be allocated for the current to reach a steady-state condition before
continuing testing.
In the transverse balance limitation shown in clause 5.1.6, the use of the "DC
portion of the loop simulator circuit" is specified. In such case, components of
R1 and C1 shall be removed.
The alternative termination in figure 1.3 may be used during signal power
compliance testing in place of R1 (600 ohms) in the applicable loop simulator
circuit.
5.1.7.1.4
Figure 1.2 defines the loop simulator for 4-wire loop-start interfaces that is
referenced for several requirements in clauses 4.4 and 5.1
Figure 1.3 is an alternative termination for use in the four-wire loop simulator circuits.
Other implementations may be used provided that the same DC voltage and current
characteristics and AC impedance characteristics will be presented to the equipment under
test as are presented in the illustrative schematic diagrams. When used, the simulator shall
be operated over the entire range of loop resistance as indicated in the figures, and with the
indicated polarities and voltage limits. Whenever loop current is changed, sufficient time
46
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
shall be allocated for the current to reach a steady-state condition before continuing testing.
5.1.7.1.5
Throughout this section, references will be made to simulated ringing. Ringing
voltages which shall be used and impedance limitations associated with
simulated ringing are shown in table 4.21.
47
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Tip
R2
C1
L
1
2
R1
V
Ring
C1 = 500 µF (-10%, + 50%)
R1 = 600 ohms  1%
L  10 H, Resistance = RL
Condition
V (V)
Switch position
for test
R2 + RL
1
Min =
42.5
Max =
56.5
Both
Continuously variable over
400 to 1740 ohms
2
105
2
2000 ohms
Figure 1.1 – Two-wire loop simulator for loop start interfaces
48
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
SW = Polarity Switch
L1 = L2 = L3 = L4 > 5 H (Resistance = RL1, RL2, RL3, RL4)
R1 = R3 = 600 ohms  1%
C1 = C2 = 500 µF, -10%, + 50%
Condition
V (Volts)
Switch position
for test
R2 + RL
1
Min = 42.6
Max = 56.5
Both
Continuously
Variable over
400 to 1740 ohms
2
105
2
2000 ohms
RL 
R R
RL1 RL 2
 L3 L 4
RL1  RL 2 RL3  RL 4
Figure 1.2 – Loop simulator circuit for four-wire loop start interfaces
49
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Figure 1.3 – Alternative termination
Table 4.21 – Simulated ringing voltages and impedance limitations
Ringing type
Range of compatible
ringing frequencies
(Hz)
Simulated ringing
voltage
superimposed on
56.5 VDC
Impedance limitation
(ohms)
A
20± 3
40 to 130 V rms
1400
30± 3
40 to 130 V rms
1000
15.3 to 34
40 to 130 V rms
1600
>34 to 49
62 to 130 V rms
1600
>49 to 68
62 to 150 V rms
1600
B
5.1.7.2
Limitations on equipment intended for operation on loop-start telephone facilities:
Approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry shall conform to
the following limitations.
5.1.7.2.1
On-hook resistance, metallic and longitudinal (up to 100 VDC): The on-hook DC
resistance between the tip and ring conductors of a loop start interface, and
between each of the tip and ring conductors and earth ground, shall be greater
than 5 M ohms for all DC voltages up to and including 100 V.
5.1.7.2.2
On-hook resistance, metallic and longitudinal (100 to 200 VDC): The on-hook
DC resistance between tip and ring conductors of a loop start interface, and
between each of the tip and ring conductors and earth ground shall be greater
than 30 k ohms for all DC voltages between 100 and 200 V.
5.1.7.2.3
DC current during ringing: During the application of simulated ringing, as listed
50
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
in table 4.21, to a loop start interface, the total DC current shall not exceed 3.0
mA. The equipment shall comply for each ringing type that is listed as part of
the ringer equivalence.
5.1.7.2.4
Ringing frequency impedance (metallic): During the application of simulated
ringing, as listed in table 4.21 to a loop start interface, the impedance between
the tip and ring conductors (defined as the quotient of applied AC voltage
divided by resulting true rms current) shall be greater than or equal to the value
specified in table 4.21. The equipment shall comply for each ringing type that is
listed as part of the ringer equivalence.
5.1.7.2.5
Ringing frequency impedance (longitudinal): During the application of simulated
ringing as listed in table 4.21 to a loop start interface, the impedance between
each of the tip and ring conductors and ground shall be greater than 100 k
ohms. The equipment shall comply with each ringing type listed in the ringer
equivalence.
5.1.7.2.6
Ringer equivalence definition: The ringer equivalence number shall be the value
determined in 5.1.7.2.7 or 5.1.7.2.8, as appropriate, followed by the ringer type
letter indicator representing the frequency range for which the number is valid. If
ringer equivalence is to be stated for more than one ringing type, testing shall be
performed at each frequency range to which ringer equivalence is to be
determined in accordance with the above, and the largest resulting ringer
equivalence number so determined shall be associated with each ringing type
letter designation for which it is valid.
5.1.7.2.7
Ringer equivalence for equipment operating on loop-start telephone facilities:
The ringer equivalence shall be five times the impedance limitation listed in table
4.21, divided by the minimum measured AC impedance, as defined in 5.1.7.2.8,
during the application of simulated ringing as listed in table 4.21.
5.1.7.2.8
Maximum ringer equivalence: All approved terminal equipment and approved
protective circuitry that can affect the ringing frequency impedance shall be
assigned a ringer equivalence. The sum of all such ringer equivalences on a
given telephone line or loop shall not exceed 5. In some cases, a system that
has a total ringer equivalence of 5 or more may not be usable on a given
telephone line or loop.
5.1.7.3
5.1.7.3.1
Transitioning to the off-hook state: Except as provided in 5.1.7.3.1 and 5.1.7.3.2
below, approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry shall not by
design leave the on-hook state by operations performed on tip and ring leads for
any other purpose than to request service or answer an incoming call. Make-busy
indications shall be transmitted by the use of make-busy leads only as defined in
clause 3.1.
Manual programming of memory dialing numbers: Terminal equipment the user
places in the off-hook state for the purpose of manually placing telephone
numbers in internal memory for subsequent automatic or repertory dialing shall
be acceptable for connection to the telephone network provided it meets all
51
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
other applicable requirements.
5.1.7.3.2
Automatic stutter dial tone detection: Terminal equipment that automatically
goes off-hook for the purpose of checking for stutter dial tone shall be
acceptable for connection to the telephone network provided it meets all other
applicable requirements and all of the following specifications and conditions:
a) The device performs no periodic testing for stutter dial tone;
b) The device makes an off-hook stutter dial tone check no more than once after
a subscriber completes a call, and completes the check no earlier than 4
seconds after the subscriber hangs-up;
c) The device makes an off-hook stutter dial tone check after an unanswered call
no more than once;
d) The device performs no off-hook stutter dial tone check after an unanswered
incoming call if the visual message indicator is already lit;
e) The device takes the line off-hook for no more than 2.1 seconds per stutter
dial tone check. Since the equipment cannot begin checking for stutter dial
tone until dial tone is present, this 2.1 second interval begins when dial tone is
applied to the line. If dial tone is not applied within 3 seconds, the equipment
should abandon the stutter dial tone check;
f) The device synchronizes off-hook checks when multiple stutter dial tone
detection and visual signaling devices are attached to the same line so that
only one check is made per calling event for a single line; and,
g) The device does not block dial tone to a subscriber attempting to initiate a call
as an off-hook stutter dial tone detection check is occurring.
5.1.7.4
Voice and data equipment loop current requirements for equipment connected to
the public switched network: The loop current through approved terminal
equipment or approved protective circuitry, when connected to a two-wire or fourwire loop simulator circuit with the 600 ohm resistor and 500 µF capacitor of the
two-wire loop simulator circuit or both pairs of the four-wire loop simulator circuit
disconnected shall, for at least 5 seconds after the equipment goes to the off-hook
state or hold state that would occur when answering an incoming call:
a) Be at least as great as the current obtained in the same loop simulator circuit
with minimum battery voltage and a maximum loop resistance when a 200
ohm resistance is connected across the tip and ring of the two-wire loop
simulator circuit or connected across the tip/ring and tip-1/ring-1 conductors
(tip and ring connected together and tip-1 and ring-1 connected together) of
the four-wire loop simulator circuit in place of the approved terminal equipment
or approved protective circuitry; or
b) Not decrease by more than 25% from its maximum value attained during this
5-second interval; unless the equipment is returned to the on-hook state
during the above 5-second interval.
5.1.8
5.1.8.1
Ground start interfaces:
General: Requirements in this section shall apply to the tip and ring conductors of
52
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
two-wire and four-wire ground start interfaces in the following configurations:
5.1.8.1.1
The tip and ring conductors shall be connected together and treated as one of
the conductors of a tip and ring pair.
5.1.8.1.2
The tip-1 and ring-1 conductors shall be connected together and treated as the
other conductor of a tip and ring pair.
5.1.8.1.3
Figure 1.4 shows a loop simulator for a two-wire ground-start interface that is
referenced for several requirements in clauses 4.4 and 5.1.
Means shall be used to generate, at the point of tip and ring connections to the
terminal equipment or protective circuitry, the parameters of DC line current and
AC impedance that are generated by the illustrative circuit figure 1.4.
The required circuit schematics are shown in figure 1.4 for two-wire ground start
interfaces.. Other implementations may be used provided that the same DC
voltage and current characteristics and AC impedance characteristics will be
presented to the equipment under test as are presented in the illustrative
schematic diagrams. When used, the simulator shall be operated over the
entire range of loop resistance as indicated in the figures, and with the indicated
polarities and voltage limits. Whenever loop current is changed, sufficient time
shall be allocated for the current to reach a steady-state condition before
continuing testing.
In the transverse balance limitation clause 4.5, the use of the "DC portion of the
loop simulator circuit" is specified. In such case components of R1 and C1 shall
be removed.
The alternative termination in figure 1.6 may be used during signal power
compliance testing in place of R1 (600 ohms) in the applicable loop simulator
circuit.
5.1.8.1.4
Figure 1.5 defines the loop simulator for a 4-wire ground-start interface that is
referenced for several requirements in clauses 4.4 and 5.1.
Figure 1.6 is an alternative termination for use in the four-wire loop simulator circuits.
Other implementations may be used provided that the same DC voltage and current
characteristics and AC impedance characteristics will be presented to the equipment under
test as are presented in the illustrative schematic diagrams. When used, the simulator shall
be operated over the entire range of loop resistance as indicated in the figures, and with the
indicated polarities and voltage limits. Whenever loop current is changed, sufficient time
shall be allocated for the current to reach a steady-state condition before continuing testing.
5.1.8.1.5
Throughout this section, references will be made to simulated ringing. Ringing
voltages which shall be used and impedance limitations associated with
simulated ringing are shown in table 4.21.
53
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Tip
R2
C1
L
1
2
R1
V
Ring
C1 = 500 µF (-10%, + 50%)
R1 = 600 ohms  1%
L  10 H, Resistance = RL
Condition
V (V)
Switch position
for test
R2 + RL
Both
Continuously variable over
400 to 1740 ohms
2
2000 ohms
Min = 42.5
1
Max = 56.5
2
105
Figure 1.4 – Two-wire loop simulator for ground start interfaces
54
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
SW = Polarity switch
L1 = L2 = L3 = L4 > 5 H (Resistance = RL1, RL2, RL3, RL4)
R1 = R3 = 600 ohms  1%
C1 = C2 = 500 µF – 10% + 50%
Condition
V (Volts)
Switch position
for test
R2 + RL
1
Min = 42.6
Max = 56.5
Both
Continuously variable over
400 to 1740 ohms
2
105
2
2000 ohms
RL 
R R
RL1 RL 2
 L3 L 4
RL1  RL 2 RL3  RL 4
Figure 1.5 – Loop simulator circuit for four-wire ground start interfaces
55
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Figure 1.6 – Alternative termination
Table 4.21 – Simulated ringing voltages and impedance limitations
Ringing type
Range of compatible
ringing frequencies
(Hz)
Simulated ringing
voltage
superimposed on
56.5 VDC
Impedance limitation
(ohms)
A
20± 3
40 to 130 V rms
1400
30± 3
40 to 130 V rms
1000
15.3 to 34
40 to 130 V rms
1600
>34 to 49
62 to 130 V rms
1600
>49 to 68
62 to 150 V rms
1600
B
5.1.8.2
Limitations on individual equipment intended for operation on ground start
telephone facilities: Approved terminal equipment and approved protective
circuitry shall conform to the following limitations:
5.1.8.2.1
DC current during ringing: During the application of simulated ringing, as listed
in table 4.21, to a ground start interface, the total DC current flowing between tip
and ring conductors shall not exceed 3.0 mA. The equipment shall comply for
each ringing type listed as part of the ringer equivalence.
5.1.8.2.2
Ringing frequency impedance (metallic): During the application of simulated
ringing, as listed in table 4.21, to a ground start interface, the total impedance of
the parallel combination of the AC impedance across tip and ring conductors
and the AC impedance from the ring conductor to ground (with ground on the tip
conductor) shall be greater than the value specified in table 4.21. The
equipment shall comply for each ringing type listed as part of the ringer
equivalence.
56
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.1.8.2.3
Ringer equivalence definition: The ringer equivalence number shall be the value
determined below, followed by the ringer type letter indicator representing the
frequency range for which the number is valid. If ringer equivalence is to be
stated for more than one ringing type, testing shall be performed at each
frequency range to which ringer equivalence is to be determined in accordance
with the above, and the largest resulting ringer equivalence number so
determined shall be associated with each ringing type letter designation for
which it is valid.
5.1.8.2.4
Ringer equivalence for equipment operating on ground-start telephone facilities:
The ringer equivalence shall be five times the impedance limitation listed in table
4.21, divided by the minimum measured AC impedance, defined in 5.1.8.2.2,
during the application of simulated ringing as listed in table 4.21.
5.1.8.2.5
Maximum ringer equivalence: All approved terminal equipment and approved
protective circuitry that can affect the ringing frequency impedance shall be
assigned a ringer equivalence. The sum of all such ringer equivalences on a
given telephone line or loop shall not exceed 5. In some cases, a system that
has a total ringer equivalence of 5 or more may not be usable on a given
telephone line or loop.
5.1.8.3
Transitioning to the off-hook state: Except as provided in 5.1.8.3.1 and 5.1.8.3.2
below, approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry shall not by
design leave the on-hook state by operations performed on tip and ring leads for
any other purpose than to request service or answer an incoming call. Make-busy
indications shall be transmitted by the use of make-busy leads only as defined in
clause 3.1.
5.1.8.3.1
Manual programming of memory dialing numbers: Terminal equipment the user
places in the off-hook state for the purpose of manually placing telephone
numbers in internal memory for subsequent automatic or repertory dialing shall
be acceptable for connection to the telephone network provided it meets all
other applicable requirements.
5.1.8.3.2
Automatic stutter dial tone detection: Terminal equipment that automatically
goes off-hook for the purpose of checking for stutter dial tone shall be
acceptable for connection to the telephone network provided it meets all other
applicable requirements and all of the following specifications and conditions:
a) The device performs no periodic testing for stutter dial tone;
b) The device makes an off-hook stutter dial tone check no more than once after
a subscriber completes a call, and completes the check no earlier than 4
seconds after the subscriber hangs-up;
c) The device makes an off-hook stutter dial tone check after an unanswered call
no more than once;
d) The device performs no off-hook stutter dial tone check after an unanswered
incoming call if the visual message indicator is already lit;
e) The device takes the line off-hook for no more than 2.1 seconds per stutter
57
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
dial tone check. Since the equipment cannot begin checking for stutter dial
tone until dial tone is present, this 2.1 second interval begins when dial tone is
applied to the line. If dial tone is not applied within 3 seconds, the equipment
should abandon the stutter dial tone check;
f)
The device synchronizes off-hook checks when multiple stutter dial tone
detection and visual signaling devices are attached to the same line so that
only one check is made per calling event for a single line; and,
g) The device does not block dial tone to a subscriber attempting to initiate a call
as an off-hook stutter dial tone detection check is occurring.
5.1.8.4
Voice and data equipment loop current requirements for equipment connected to
the public switched network: The loop current through approved terminal
equipment or approved protective circuitry, when connected to a two-wire or fourwire loop simulator circuit with the 600 ohms resistor and 500 µF capacitor of the
two-wire loop simulator circuit or both pairs of the four-wire loop simulator circuit
disconnected shall, for at least 5 seconds after the equipment goes to the off-hook
state that would occur when answering an incoming call:
a) Be at least as great as the current obtained in the same loop simulator circuit
with minimum battery voltage and a maximum loop resistance when a 200
ohm resistance is connected across the tip and ring of the two-wire loop
simulator circuit or connected across the tip/ring and tip-1/ring-1 conductors
(tip and ring connected together and tip-1 and ring-1 connected together) of
the four-wire loop simulator circuit in place of the approved terminal equipment
or approved protective circuitry; or
b) Not decrease by more than 25% from its maximum value attained during this
5-second interval; unless the equipment is returned to the on-hook state
during the above 5-second interval.
58
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.1.9
5.1.9.1
Loop reverse battery – incoming:
Figure 1.7 defines the loop simulator for 2-wire loop reverse battery (incoming)
interfaces that is referenced for several requirements in clauses 4.4 and 5.1. The
maximum loop closure resistance of 2450 ohms and lack of a network-provided
series aiding voltage were chosen to simplify compliance testing and should not
be interpreted as limits on network characteristics. For interface compatibility
information, see T1.405-2002 or a subsequent version of that standard.
Means shall be used to generate, at the point of tip and ring connections to the
terminal equipment or protective circuitry, the parameters of DC line current and
AC impedance that are generated by the illustrative circuit figure 1.7.
In the transverse balance limitation clause 4.5, the use of the "DC portion of the
loop simulator circuit" is specified. In such case components of R1 and C1 shall be
removed.
The alternative termination in figure 1.9 may be used during signal power
compliance testing in place of R1 (600 ohms) in the applicable loop simulator
circuit.
5.1.9.2
Figure 1.8 defines the loop simulator for 4-wire loop reverse battery interfaces
(incoming) that is referenced for several requirements in clauses 4.4 and 5.1. The
maximum loop closure resistance of 2450 ohms and lack of a network-provided
series aiding voltage were chosen to simplify compliance testing and should not
be interpreted as limits on network characteristics. For interface compatibility
information, see T1.405-2002 or a subsequent version of that standard.
Tip
R2
C1
L
R1
Ring
C1 = 500 µF (-10%, + 50%)
R1 = 600 ohms  1%
L  10 H, Resistance = RL
R2 + RL
Continuously variable over 400 to 2450 ohms
Figure 1.7 – Loop simulator for reverse battery circuits
59
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
L1 = L2 = L3 = L4 > 5 H (Resistance = RL1, RL2, RL3, RL4)
R1 = R3 = 600 ohms  1%
C1 = C2 = 500 µF – 10% + 50%
R2 + RL
Continuously variable over 400 to 2450 ohms
RL 
R R
RL1 RL 2
 L3 L 4
RL1  RL 2 RL3  RL 4
Figure 1.8 – Loop simulator circuit for four-wire reverse battery circuits
60
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Figure 1.9 – Alternative termination
5.1.9.3
Direct Inward Dialing (DID). Voltages applied by the PBX (or similar systems) to
DID interface leads for supervisory purposes shall be negative with respect to
ground, shall not be more than -56.5 VDC with respect to ground, and shall not
have a significant AC component. The AC component shall not exceed 5 VP,
where not otherwise controlled by clause 4.3.
5.1.9.4
Billing protection requirements for direct inward dialing:
5.1.9.4.1
For approved terminal equipment, the off-hook state shall be applied within 0.5
seconds of the time that:
5.1.9.4.1.1
The terminal equipment permits the acceptance of further digits that may be
used to route the incoming call to another destination.
5.1.9.4.1.2
The terminal equipment transmits signals towards the calling party, except for
the call progress tones, i.e., busy, reorder and audible ring, and the call is:
a) Answered by the called, or another station;
b) Answered by the attendant;
c) Routed to a customer controlled or defined recorded announcement, except
for ‘‘number invalid,’’ ‘‘not in service,’’ or ‘‘not assigned;’’
d) Routed to a dial prompt; or
e) Routed back to the public switched telephone network or other destination and
the call is answered. If the status of the answered call cannot be reliably
determined by the terminal equipment through means such as, detection of
answer supervision or voice energy, removal of audible ring, etc., the off-hook
state shall be applied after an interval of not more than 20 seconds from the
time of such routing. The off-hook state shall be maintained for the duration of
the call.
61
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.1.9.4.2
For approved protective circuitry:
5.1.9.4.2.1
Approved protective circuitry shall block transmission incoming from the
network until an off-hook signal is received from the terminal equipment.
5.1.9.4.2.2
Approved protective circuitry shall provide an off-hook signal within 0.5
seconds following the receipt of an off-hook signal from the terminal equipment
and shall maintain this off-hook signal for the duration of the call.
5.1.10 E&M:
5.1.10.1 Type I E&M leads: Approved terminal equipment shall comply with the following
requirements for terminal equipment on the ‘‘A’’ or ‘‘B’’ side of the interface as
shown in figure 1.10 and figure 1.11.
5.1.10.1.1 The DC current on the E lead shall not exceed 100 mA.
5.1.10.1.2 The maximum DC potentials to ground shall not exceed the values in table 4.2
when measured across a resistor of 20 k ohms ± 10%:
5.1.10.2 The maximum AC potential between E&M leads and ground reference shall not
exceed 5 VP.
5.1.10.2.1 M lead protection shall be provided so that voltages to ground do not exceed 60
V. For relay contact implementation, a power dissipation capability of 0.5 W
shall be provided in the shunt path.
5.1.10.2.2 If the approved terminal equipment contains an inductive component in the E
lead, it shall assure that the transient voltage across the contact as a result of a
relay contact opening does not exceed the following voltage and duration
limitations:
a) 300 VP,
b) A rate of change of one V per µs, and
c) 60 V level after 20 ms.
5.1.10.3 Type II E&M leads. Approved terminal equipment shall comply with the following
requirements when connected as shown in figure 1.10 and figure 1.11:
5.1.10.3.1 For terminal equipment on the ‘‘A’’ side of the interface, the DC current in the E
lead shall not exceed 100 mA. The maximum AC potential between the E lead
and ground shall not exceed 5 VP.
5.1.10.3.2 For terminal equipment on the ‘‘B’’ side of the interface, the DC current in the SB
lead shall not exceed 100 mA. The maximum AC potential between the SB lead
and ground shall not exceed 5 VP.
62
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.1.10.3.3 The maximum DC potentials to ground shall not exceed the values in table 4.3
when measured across a resistor of 20 k ohms ± 10%:
Figure 1.10 – E&M types I & II signaling for approved TE on “A” side of interface.
63
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Figure 1.11 – E&M types I & II signaling for approved TE on “B” side of interface.
64
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 4.2 – Type I E&M, DC potentials
E lead
M lead
TE on “B” side originates
signals to network on E lead.
5V
5V
TE on “A” side originates
signals to network on M lead
-56.5 V; no positive
potential with respect to
ground.
-56.5 V; no positive
potential with respect to
ground.
Table 4.3 – Type II E&M, DC potentials
E lead
TE on “B” side of
the interface
originates signals
to network on E
lead.
TE on “A” side of
the interface
originates signals
to network on M
lead
M lead
SB lead
SG lead
5V
5V
-56.5 V; no
positive potential
with respect to
ground
5V
-56.5 V, no
positive
potential with
respect to
ground
5V
5V
5V
5.1.10.3.4 The maximum AC potential to ground shall not exceed 5 VP on the following
leads, from sources in the terminal equipment:
a)M, SG and SB leads for terminal equipment on the ‘‘A’’ side of the interface.
b)E, SG and M leads for terminal equipment on the ‘‘B’’ side of the interface.
5.1.10.3.5 If the approved terminal equipment contains an inductive component in the (E)
or (M) lead, it shall assure that the transient voltage across the contact as a
result of a relay contact opening does not exceed the following voltage and
duration limitations:
a) 300 VP,
b) A rate of change of one V/µs, and
c) A 60 V level after 20 ms.
65
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.1.11 Off premises station (OPS):
5.1.11.1 OPS line simulator circuit: Figure AA shows the type of loop simulator circuit that
shall be used when testing TE with a two-wire OPS interface.
Alternative implementations may be used provided that the same range of
resistance, DC voltage and current characteristics, and AC impedance
characteristics of figure AA shall be presented to the equipment under test tip (T
OPS) and ring (R OPS) leads.
Whenever loop current is changed, sufficient time shall be allocated for the current
to reach a steady-state condition before testing continues.
For transverse balance limitations in subclause 5.1.6, the use of the DC portion of
the loop simulator is specified. In such cases, R1 and C1 shall be removed.
Tests for compliance shall be made with either R1 = 600 ohms or R1 replaced by
the alternative termination specified in figure 1.8.
When used, the OPS line simulator shall be operated over the entire range of loop
resistances and polarities in the following table:
Conditions
R2 + RL continuously variable
Switch
position
number
over the following range
Class A
Class B
Class C
1
1
Up to 200
ohms
Up to 800
ohms
Up to 1800
ohms
2
2
Not Applicable
200 to 2300
ohms
900 to 3300
ohms
66
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Figure AA – Off-premises station loop simulator
5.1.11.2 Minimum DC loop current: Approved terminal equipment and approved protective
circuitry shall provide at least 16 mA of loop current across the range of
resistances for the applicable type of OPS port (class A, class B, or class C) as
shown above in the table in clause 5.1.11.1.
In addition, approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry with
class B or class C interfaces shall provide at least 20 mA of DC loop current into
the OPS line simulator circuit under the following conditions:
R2 + R L
Condition
Class B
Class C
1
600
1300
2
1800
2500
5.1.11.3 The maximum DC current into a short circuit across tip (T(OPS)) and ring
(R(OPS)) leads of approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry
with class B and class C OPS interfaces shall not exceed 140 mA.
5.1.11.4 The maximum open circuit DC voltage provided across the tip (T(OPS)) and ring
(R(OPS)) leads of approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry
for all classes of OPS interfaces shall not exceed 56.5 V.
5.1.11.5 Hazardous voltage limit for talking and supervisory voltages: Talking battery or
voltages applied by the PBX (or similar systems) to all classes of OPS interface
67
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
leads for supervisory purposes and during network control signaling shall be
negative with respect to ground, shall not be more than -56.5 VDC with respect to
ground, and shall not have a significant AC component. The AC component shall
not exceed 5 VP, unless otherwise controlled by subclause 5.1.2.3.
5.1.11.6 Hazardous voltage limits for ringing signals: Ringing signals applied by approved
terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry to all classes of OPS
interface leads shall comply with the requirements in this subclause.
5.1.11.6.1 Ringing voltages shall be applied between the ring conductor and ground.
5.1.11.6.2 The ringing signal shall use only frequencies whose fundamental component is
equal to or less than 70 Hz.
5.1.11.6.3 The ringing voltage shall be less than 300 V peak to peak and less than 200 V
peak to ground across a resistive termination of at least 1 M ohms.
5.1.11.6.4 The ringing voltage shall be interrupted to create continuous quiet intervals of at
least one second duration each, separated by no more than 5 seconds. During
the quiet intervals, the voltage to ground shall not exceed the voltage limits
given in subclause 1.1.1.4.
5.1.11.6.5 Ringing voltage sources shall comply with the following requirements:
a) If the ringing current through a 500 ohm (and greater) resistor does not
exceed 100 mAP-P, neither a ring trip device nor a monitoring voltage is
required.
b) If the ringing current through a 1500 ohm (and greater) resistor exceeds 100
mAP-P, the ringing source shall include a current-sensitive ring trip device in
series with the ring lead that will trip ringing as specified in figure 4.4 in
accordance with the following conditions:
1. If the ring trip device operates as specified in figure 4.4 with R = 500
ohms (and greater), no monitoring voltage is required;
2. If, however, the ring trip device only operates as specified in figure 4.4
with R = 1500 ohms (and greater), then the ringing voltage source
shall also provide a monitoring voltage between 19 VDC and 56.5
VDC, negative with respect to ground, on the tip or ring conductor.
c) If the ringing current through a 500 ohms (and greater) resistor exceeds 100
mAP-P but does not exceed 100 mAP-P with 1500 ohm (and greater)
termination, the ringing voltage source shall include either a ring trip device
that meets the operating characteristics specified in figure 4.4 with 500 ohm
(and greater) resistor, or a monitoring voltage as specified in subclause
5.1.11.4.4(b). If the operating characteristics specified in this subclause are
not met with both the 500 ohm and 1500 ohm terminations, then the terminal
equipment under test fails (see table 4.5).
68
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 4.4a – Summary of ring-trip requirements
Ringing current
(mA P-P)
5.1.11.6.5
Function
required
Ring-trip device operates
per figure 4.4
R = 500
ohms and
greater
R = 1500
ohms and
greater
Ringtrip
Monitor
voltage
(a)
<100
<100
Optional
Optional
Optional
(b)(1)
N/A
>100
Yes
Optional
Yes for both resistances
(b)(2)
N/A
>100
Yes
Yes
Yes for R = 1500 ohms and greater
No for R = 500 ohms and greater
(c)
>100
<100
Ringing
voltage
source
1000
Peak to peak current, I (mA)
500
Either ring-trip device
or monitor voltage
Yes for R = 500 ohms and greater, if
ring-trip device is used
Ringing
voltage
tripping
circuit
I
600 mA
28 ms
TIP
200
100
50
20
.02
.05
0.1
RING
0.5
1.0
Maximum time to trip (s)
2.0
Figure 4.4 – Ringing voltage trip criteria
69
R
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.1.11.7 OPS interfaces for PBX with DID (ring trip requirement): PBX ringing supplies
whose output appears on the off-premises interface leads shall not trip when
connected to a tip-to-ring impedance that terminates the off premises station loop
with a terminating impedance composed of the parallel combination of a 15 k
ohms resistor and an RC series circuit (resistor and capacitor) whose AC
impedance is as specified in table 4.22.
Table 4.22 – Tip-ring impedance for off-premises station loop
Ringing freq (Hz)
AC impedance (ohms)
Class B or C
Class A
20 ± 3
7000/N
1400
30 ± 3
5000/N
1000
NOTE – N = Number of ringer equivalences, as specified by the manufacturer, which can
be connected to the off-premises station loop.
70
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.1.12 Private line:
5.1.12.1 Figure 1.12 defines the loop simulator for voice band metallic channel interfaces
that is referenced for several requirements in clauses 4.4 and 5.1. For transverse
balance measurements, the DC portion of the loop simulator shall be provided by
removing R1 and C1. Companion terminal equipment grounds (including power
supplies) shall be isolated from transverse balance circuit grounds.
5.1.12.2 The alternative termination in figure 1.9 may be used during signal power
compliance testing in place of R1 (600 ohms) in the applicable loop simulator
circuit.
Tip
Tip
R2
C1
Terminal
Equipment
Under Test
Companion
Terminal
Equipment
RX
R1
L
Ring
Ring
C1 = 500 µF – 10% + 50%
R1 = 600 ohms  1%
L = 10 H Resistance = RL
R2 + RL are continuously variable from RL to RX;
Where RX = Maximum external circuit resistance supported by the equipment
under test, and RL << RX
Figure 1.10 – Loop simulator circuit for voice band metallic channels
5.1.12.3 Hazardous voltage limits for ringdown voice band private line and voice band
metallic channel interface: During normal operation, approved terminal
equipment for connection to ringdown voice band private line interfaces or voice
band metallic channel interfaces shall ensure that:
5.1.12.3.1 Ringing voltage shall not exceed the voltage and current limits specified in
5.1.12.4, and are:
a) Applied to the ring conductor with the tip conductor grounded for two-wire
interfaces, or
b) Applied to the tip and ring conductors with ground applied to the tip-1 and ring-1
conductors for four-wire interfaces using simplex signaling.
71
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.1.12.3.2 Except during the signaling mode or for monitoring voltage, there shall be no
significant positive DC voltage (not over +5 V) with respect to ground:
a) For two-wire ports between the tip lead and ground and the ring lead and ground
and
b) For four-wire ports between the tip lead and ground, the ring lead and ground,
the tip-1 lead and ground, and the ring-1 lead and ground.
5.1.12.3.3 The DC current per lead, under short circuit conditions shall not exceed 140 mA.
5.1.12.4 Ringing sources shall meet all of the following restrictions:
5.1.12.4.1 Ringing signal frequency: The ringing signal shall use only frequencies whose
fundamental component is equal to or below 70 Hz.
5.1.12.4.2 Ringing signal voltage: The ringing voltage shall be less than 300 VP-P and less
than 200 V peak-to-ground across a resistive termination of at least 1 M ohms.
5.1.12.4.3 Ringing signal interruption rate: The ringing voltage shall be interrupted to
create quiet intervals of at least one second (continuous) duration each
separated by no more than 5 seconds. During the quiet intervals, the voltage to
ground shall not be more than -56.5 VDC with respect to ground, and shall not
have a significant AC component. The AC component shall not exceed 5 VP,
unless otherwise controlled by clause 4.3.
5.1.12.4.4 Ringing signal sources: Ringing voltage sources shall comply with the following
requirements:
a) If the ringing current through a 500 ohms (and greater) resistor does not
exceed 100 mAP-P, neither a ring trip device nor a monitoring voltage is
required.
b) If the ringing current through a 1500 ohms (and greater) resistor exceeds 100
mAP-P, the ringing source shall include a current-sensitive ring trip device in
series with the ring lead that will trip ringing as specified in figure 4.4 in
accordance with the following conditions:
1. If the ring trip device operates as specified in figure 4.4 with R = 500
ohms (and greater), no monitoring voltage is required;
2. If, however, the ring trip device only operates as specified in figure 4.4
with R = 1500 ohms (and greater) then the ringing voltage source
shall also provide a monitoring voltage between 19 VDC and 56.5
VDC, negative with respect to ground, on the tip or ring conductor.
c) If the ringing current through a 500 ohms (and greater) resistor exceeds 100
mAP-P but does not exceed 100 mAP-P with 1500 ohm (and greater)
termination, the ringing voltage source shall include either a ring trip device
that meets the operating characteristics specified in figure 4.4 with 500 ohm
(and greater) resistor, or a monitoring voltage as specified in 5.1.12.4 (b). If
the operating characteristics specified in this subclause are not met with both
72
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
the 500 ohm and 1500 ohm terminations, then the terminal equipment under
test fails (see table 4.5).
Ringing
voltage
source
1000
Peak to peak current, I (mA)
500
Ringing
voltage
tripping
circuit
I
600 mA
28 ms
TIP
200
100
50
20
.02
.05
0.1
RING
0.5
1.0
Maximum time to trip (s)
2.0
Figure 4.4 – Ringing voltage trip criteria
73
R
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 4.4 – Summary of ring-trip requirements
5.1.12.4.4
Ringing current
(mA P-P)
Function required
Ring-trip device operates
per figure 4.4
R = 500
ohms and
greater
R = 1500
ohms and
greater
Ring-trip
Monitor
voltage
(a)
<100
<100
Optional
Optional
Optional
(b)(1)
N/A
>100
Yes
Optional
Yes for both resistances
Yes
Yes for R = 1500 ohms and
greater
No for R = 500 ohms and
greater
(b)(2)
N/A
>100
Yes
(c)
>100
<100
Either ring-trip
device or monitor
voltage
74
Yes for R = 500 ohms and
greater, if ring-trip device is
used
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.2
DIGITAL INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS
5.2.1
Local area data channel (LADC):
ZP
T
RV/2
R4A
R3A
C3A
R1
Terminal
Equipment
Under
Test
C1
C4A
R2A
C2A
R2B
C2B
R4B
R
R3B
Companion
Terminal
Equipment
C4B
C3B
ZP
RV/2
C1 = .00402 µF
C2A = C2B = 0.121 µF
C3A = C3B = .0511 µF
C4A = C4B = 500 µF
R1 = 492 ohms
R2A = R2B = 147 ohms
R3A = R3B = 88.7 ohms
R4A = R4B = 340 ohms
NOTE 1 –Component tolerances are  2%.
NOTE 2 – RV + RP = 50 through 3000 ohms.
NOTE 3 – ZP is the magnitude of the low-pass filter impedance that is 3000
ohms from 10 Hz to 6 kHz (25 ohms DC)
NOTE 4 – RP/2 = DC resistance of low-pass filter, ZP in parallel with 428.7
ohms.
Figure 1.11 – LADC impedance simulator for metallic voltage tests
75
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.2.1.1
Local area data channel interfaces: LADC approved terminal equipment shall
comply with the metallic voltage limitations when connected to circuits of figure
1.11 and shall comply with the longitudinal limitations when connected to circuits
of figure 4.5, as indicated. The schematic of figure 1.11 is illustrative of the type of
circuit that shall be used over the given frequency ranges. When used, the
simulator shall be operated over the appropriate range of loop resistance for the
equipment under test, under all voltages and polarities that the terminal under test
and a connected companion unit are capable of providing.
5.2.1.1.1
Except during the transmission of ringing and dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF)
signals, LADC approved terminal equipment shall comply with all requirements
in all operating states and with loop current that may be drawn for such
purposes as loop back signaling. The requirements in 4.4.5.1 except in
4.4.5.1.1 and 4.4.5.1.2 shall also apply during the application of ringing. The
requirement in 4.4.3 and the requirements in 4.4.5.1.1 and 4.4.5.1.2 shall apply
during ringing for frequencies above 300 Hz and with the maximum voltage
limits raised by 10 dB. DTMF signals which are used for the transmission of
alpha-numeric information and which comply with the requirements in 4.4.5.1.1,
and in 4.4.5.2 or 4.4.5.3 as applicable, shall be deemed to comply with the
requirements in 4.4.5.1.2 provided that, for automatically originated DTMF
signals, the duty cycle is less than 50%.
5.2.1.1.2
LADC approved terminal equipment shall comply with all applicable
requirements, except those specified in sections 4.4.5.1.1 and 4.4.5.1.2, during
the transmission of each possible data signal sequence of any length. For
compliance with 4.4.6.3.1, the limitation applies to the rms voltage averaged as
follows:
a) For digital signals, baseband or modulated on a carrier, for which there are
defined signal element intervals, the rms voltage shall be averaged over each
such interval. Where multiple carriers are involved, the voltage is defined as
the power sum of the rms voltages for the signal element intervals for each
carrier.
b) For baseband analog signals, the rms voltage shall be averaged over each
period (cycle) of the highest frequency of the signal (-3 dB point on the
spectrum). For analog signals that are modulated on a carrier (whether or not
the carrier is suppressed), it shall be averaged over each period (cycle) of the
carrier. Where multiple carriers are involved, the voltage is defined as the
power sum of the rms voltage for each carrier.
c) For signals other than the types defined in 4.4.6.6(a) and 4.4.6.6(b) and (1)
above, the peak amplitude of the signal shall not exceed +1 dBV.
5.2.1.1.3
Equipment shall comply with the requirements in 4.4.5.1.1 and 4.4.5.1.2, during
any data sequence that may be transmitted during normal use with a probability
greater than 0.001. If the sequences transmitted by the equipment are
application dependent, the user instruction material shall include a statement of
any limitations assumed in demonstrating compliance of the equipment.
5.2.1.1.4
In addition to the conditions specified in 4.4.6.5, LADC approved terminal
76
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
equipment which operates in one or more modes as a receiver, shall comply
with requirements in 4.4.5.3 with a tone at all frequencies in the range of
potential received signals and at the maximum power which may be received.
5.2.1.2
For local area data channel interfaces, during normal operating modes including
terminal equipment initiated maintenance signals, approved terminal equipment
shall ensure, except during the application of ringing, with respect to telephone
connections (tip, ring, tip-1, ring-1) that:
5.2.1.2.1
Under normal operating conditions, the rms current per conductor between
short-circuit conductors, including DC and AC components, does not exceed
350 mA. For other than normal operating conditions, the rms current between
any conductor and ground or between short-circuited conductors, including DC
and AC components, may exceed 350 mA for no more than 1.5 minutes;
5.2.1.2.2
The DC voltage between any conductor and ground does not exceed 60 V.
Under normal operating conditions it shall not be positive with respect to ground
(though positive voltages up to 60 V may be allowed during brief maintenance
states);
5.2.1.2.3
AC voltages are less than 42.4 VP between any conductor and ground. Terminal
equipment shall comply while other interface leads are:
a) Un-terminated, and
b) Individually terminated to ground
Combined AC and DC voltages between any conductor and ground shall be
less than 42.4 VP when the absolute value of the DC component is less than
21.2 V; and less than (32.8 + 0.454 x VDC) when the absolute value of the DC
component is between 21.2 and 60 V.
5.2.1.3
Ringing sources: Ringing sources shall meet all of the following restrictions:
5.2.1.3.1
Ringing signal frequency: The ringing signal shall use only frequencies whose
fundamental component is equal to or below 70 Hz.
5.2.1.3.2
Ringing signal voltage: The ringing voltage shall be less than 300 VP-P and less
than 200 V peak-to-ground across a resistive termination of at least 1 M ohms.
5.2.1.3.3
Ringing signal interruption rate: The ringing voltage shall be interrupted to
create quiet intervals of at least one second (continuous) duration each
separated by no more than 5 seconds. During the quiet intervals, the voltage to
ground shall not exceed the voltage limits given in 4.3.1.4.1.
5.2.1.3.4
Ringing signal sources: Ringing voltage sources shall comply with the following
requirements:
a) If the ringing current through a 500 ohms (and greater) resistor does not
exceed 100 mAP-P, neither a ring trip device nor a monitoring voltage is
77
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
required.
b) If the ringing current through a 1500 ohms (and greater) resistor exceeds 100
mAP-P, the ringing source shall include a current-sensitive ring trip device in
series with the ring lead that will trip ringing as specified in figure 4.4 in
accordance with the following conditions:
1. If the ring trip device operates as specified in figure 4.4 with R = 500
ohms (and greater), no monitoring voltage is required;
2. If, however, the ring trip device only operates as specified in figure 4.4
with R = 1500 ohms (and greater) then the ringing voltage source
shall also provide a monitoring voltage between 19 VDC and 56.5
VDC, negative with respect to ground, on the tip or ring conductor.
c) If the ringing current through a 500 ohms (and greater) resistor exceeds 100
mAP-P but does not exceed 100 mAP-P with 1500 ohm (and greater)
termination, the ringing voltage source shall include either a ring trip device
that meets the operating characteristics specified in figure 4.4 with 500 ohm
(and greater) resistor, or a monitoring voltage as specified in (b) above. If the
operating characteristics specified in clause 4.3 are not met with both the 500
ohm and 1500 ohm terminations, then the terminal equipment under test fails
(see table 4.5).
78
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Ringing
voltage
source
1000
Peak to peak current, I (mA)
500
Ringing
voltage
tripping
circuit
I
600 mA
28 ms
TIP
200
100
50
20
.02
.05
0.1
RING
0.5
1.0
Maximum time to trip (s)
2.0
Figure 4.5 – Ringing voltage trip criteria
79
R
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 4.4 – Summary of ring-trip requirements
5.2.1.3.4
Ringing current
(mA P-P)
Function required
Ring-trip device operates
per figure 4.4
R = 500
ohms and
greater
R = 1500 ohms
and greater
Ring-trip
Monitor
voltage
(a)
<100
<100
Optional
Optional
Optional
(b)(1)
N/A
>100
Yes
Optional
Yes for both resistances
Yes
Yes for R = 1500 ohms and
greater
No for R = 500 ohms and
greater
(b)(2)
N/A
>100
(c)
>100
<100
5.2.1.4
Yes
Either ring-trip device or
monitor voltage
Yes for R = 500 ohms and
greater, if ring-trip device is
used
LADC interface: The metallic voltage shall comply with the general requirements
in subclause 5.2.1.4.1 as well as the additional requirements specified in 5.2.1.4.2
and 5.2.1.4.3. LADC approved terminal equipment shall comply with the metallic
voltage limitations when connected to circuits of figure 1.10 and shall comply with
the longitudinal limitations when connected to circuits of figure 4.5, as indicated.
Terminal equipment for which the magnitude of the source and/or terminating
impedance exceeds 300 ohms, at any frequency in the range of 100 kHz to 6
MHz, at which the signal (transmitted and/or received) has significant power, shall
be deemed not to comply with these requirements. A signal shall be considered
to have ‘‘significant power’’ at a given frequency if that frequency is contained in a
designated set of frequency bands that collectively have the property that the rms
voltage of the signal components in those bands is at least 90% of the rms
voltage of the total signal. The designated set of frequency bands shall be used
in testing all frequencies.
5.2.1.4.1
5.2.1.4.1.1
Metallic voltages — frequencies below 4 kHz:
The weighted rms metallic voltage in the frequency band from 10 Hz to 4 kHz,
averaged over 100 ms that is the resultant of all the component metallic
voltages in the band after weighting according to the transfer function of f/4000
where f is the frequency in Hz, shall not exceed the maximum indicated below
under the conditions stated in 4.4.6.
80
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.2.1.4.1.2
5.2.1.4.2
5.2.1.4.2.1
Frequency range
Maximum voltage
10 Hz to 4 kHz
+3 dBV
RMS voltage in 100 Hz bands in the frequency range 0.7 kHz to 4 kHz: The
rms metallic voltage averaged over 100 ms in the 100-Hz bands having center
frequencies between 750 Hz and 3950 Hz shall not exceed the maximum
indicated below.
Center freq (f) of 100-Hz bands
Max voltage in all 100-Hz bands
750 to 3950 Hz
-6 dBV
Metallic voltages—frequencies above 4 kHz—LADC interface:
The rms voltage as averaged over 100 ms in all possible 100 Hz bands
between 4 kHz and 270 kHz for the indicated range of center frequencies and
under the conditions specified in 4.4.6 shall not exceed the maximum indicated
below:
Center freq (f) of all 100 Hz bands
Max voltage in all 100 Hz bands
4.05 kHz to 4.6 kHz
0.5 dBV
4.60 kHz to 5.45 kHz
(59.2-90 log f) dBV
5.45 kHz to 59.12 kHz
(7.6-20 log f) dBV
59.12 kHz to 266.00 kHz
(43.1-40 log f) dBV
NOTE – f = center frequency in kHz of each of the possible 100 Hz bands.
5.2.1.4.2.2
The rms voltage as averaged over 100 ms in all of the possible 8 kHz bands
between 4 kHz and 270 kHz for the indicated range of center frequencies and
under the conditions specified in 4.4.6 shall not exceed the maximum indicated
below:
Center freq (f) of 8 kHz bands
Max voltage in all 8 kHz bands
8 kHz to 120 kHz
(17.6—20 log f) dBV
120 kHz to 266 kHz
(59.2—40 log f) dBV
NOTE – f = center frequency in kHz of each of the possible 8-kHz bands
5.2.1.4.2.3
The rms value of the metallic voltage components in the frequency range of
270 kHz to 30 MHz, averaged over 2 µs, shall not exceed -15 dBV with a
81
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
metallic termination having an impedance of
5.2.1.4.2.4
5.2.1.4.3
135 ohms.
The total peak voltage for all frequency components in the 4 kHz to 6 MHz
band shall not exceed 4.0 V.
Longitudinal voltage:
5.2.1.4.3.1
5.2.1.4.3.2
Frequencies below 4 kHz: The weighted rms voltage in the frequency band
from 10 Hz to 4 kHz, averaged over 100 ms is the resultant of all the
component longitudinal voltages in the band after weighting according to the
transfer function of f/4000, where f is the frequency in Hz. The resultant
weighted rms voltage shall not exceed the maximum indicated below under the
conditions stated in 4.4.6.
Frequency Range
Maximum RMS voltage
10 Hz to 4 kHz
-37 dBV
4 kHz to 270 kHz:
Center freq (f)
of 8 kHz bands
Max voltage
in all 8 kHz bands
Longitudinal
terminating
impedance
8 to 12 kHz
-(18.4+20 log f) dBV
500 ohms
12 to 42 kHz
(3–40 log f) dBV
90 ohms
42 to 266 kHz
-62 dBV
90 ohms.
NOTE – f = center frequency in kHz of each of the possible 8-kHz bands.
5.2.1.4.3.3
5.2.1.5
5.2.1.5.1
270 kHz to 6 MHz: The rms value of the longitudinal voltage components in
the frequency range of 270 kHz to 6 MHz, averaged over 2 ms, shall not
exceed -30 dBV with a longitudinal termination having an impedance of 90
ohms.
Requirements in 5.2.1 shall apply under the following conditions:
All approved terminal equipment, except equipment to be used on LADC, and all
approved protective circuitry, shall comply with the limitations when connected
to a termination equivalent to the circuit depicted in figure 4.5 and when placed
in all operating states of the equipment except during network control signaling.
LADC approved terminal equipment shall comply with the metallic voltage
limitations when connected to circuits of figure 1.10 and shall comply with the
longitudinal limitations when connected to circuits of figure 4.5, as indicated.
82
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
NOTE – All resistor values are in ohms.
Figure 4.6 – Resistive terminations
5.2.1.5.2
All approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry shall comply
with the limitations in the off-hook state over the range of loop currents that
would flow with the equipment connected to an appropriate simulator circuit.
5.2.1.5.3
Approved terminal equipment and approved protective circuitry with provision for
through-transmission from other equipments shall comply with the limitations
with a 1000 Hz tone applied from a 600 ohms source (or, if appropriate a source
which reflects a 600 ohms impedance across tip and ring) at the maximum level
that would be applied during normal operation. Approved protective circuitry for
83
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
data shall also comply with the tone level 10 dB higher than the overload point.
5.2.1.5.4
For approved terminal equipment or approved protective circuitry with nonapproved signal source input, such as music on hold, the out of band signal
power requirements shall be met using an input signal with a frequency range of
200 Hz to 20 kHz and the level set at the overload point.
5.2.1.5.5
Except during the transmission of ringing and dual tone multi-frequency (DTMF)
signals, LADC approved terminal equipment shall comply with all requirements
in all operating states and with loop current that may be drawn for such
purposes as loop back signaling. The requirements in 4.4.5.1 except in
4.4.5.1.1 and 4.4.5.1.2 shall also apply during the application of ringing. The
requirement in 4.5.4 and the requirements in 4.4.5.1.1 and 4.4.5.1.2 shall apply
during ringing for frequencies above 300 Hz and with the maximum voltage
limits raised by 10 dB. DTMF signals which are used for the transmission of
alpha-numeric information and which comply with the requirements in 4.4.5.1.1,
and in 4.4.5.2 or 4.4.5.3 as applicable, shall be deemed to comply with the
requirements in 4.4.5.1.2 provided that, for automatically originated DTMF
signals, the duty cycle is less than 50%.
5.2.1.5.6
LADC approved terminal equipment shall comply with all applicable
requirements, except those specified in sections 4.4.6.1.1 and 4.4.6.1.2, during
the transmission of each possible data signal sequence of any length. For
compliance with 4.4.6.3.1, the limitation applies to the rms voltage averaged as
follows:
a) For digital signals, baseband or modulated on a carrier, for which there are
defined signal element intervals, the rms voltage shall be averaged over each
such interval. Where multiple carriers are involved, the voltage is defined as
the power sum of the rms voltages for the signal element intervals for each
carrier.
b) For baseband analog signals, the rms voltage shall be averaged over each
period (cycle) of the highest frequency of the signal (-3 dB point on the
spectrum). For analog signals that are modulated on a carrier (whether or not
the carrier is suppressed), it shall be averaged over each period (cycle) of the
carrier. Where multiple carriers are involved, the voltage is defined as the
power sum of the rms voltage for each carrier.
c) For signals other than the types defined in 4.4.6.6(a) and 4.4.6.6(b) and (1)
above, the peak amplitude of the signal shall not exceed +1 dBV.
5.2.1.5.7
Equipment shall comply with the requirements in 4.4.5.1.1 and 4.4.5.1.2, during
any data sequence that may be transmitted during normal use with a probability
greater than 0.001. If the sequences transmitted by the equipment are
application dependent, the user instruction material shall include a statement of
any limitations assumed in demonstrating compliance of the equipment.
5.2.1.5.8
In addition to the conditions specified in 4.4.6.5, LADC approved terminal
equipment which operates in one or more modes as a receiver, shall comply
with requirements in 4.4.6.3 with a tone at all frequencies in the range of
potential received signals and at the maximum power which may be received.
84
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.2.1.6
Technical description and application:
The transverse balancem-l coefficient is expressed as:
Balance m-l = 20 log10 [VM / VL]
Where VL is the longitudinal voltage produced across a longitudinal termination
RL and VM is the metallic voltage across the tip-ring or tip-1 and ring-1 interface
of the input port when a voltage (in the frequency range provided in table
4.19(a) and table 4.20(b)) is applied at all values of DC loop current that the
port under test is capable of drawing when attached to the appropriate loop
from a balanced source with a metallic impedance RM (see table 4.19 and table
4.20(a)). The source voltage shall be set such that VM = V (volts). (See table
4.19 or table 4.20(a) when a termination of RM is substituted for the terminal
equipment).
5.2.1.6.1
The minimum transverse balance coefficient specified in this section (as
appropriate) shall be equaled or exceeded for all two-wire network ports, OPS
line ports and the transmit pair (tip and ring) and receive pair (tip-1 and ring-1) of
all four-wire network ports simulator circuits at all values of DC loop current that
the port under test is capable of drawing when attached to the appropriate loop
(see figure 1.4). An illustrative test circuit that satisfies the above conditions is
shown in figure 4.10 for analog and figure 4.11 for digital and subrate. Other
means may be used to determine the specified transverse balance coefficient,
provided that adequate documentation of the appropriateness, precision, and
accuracy of the alternative means is provided.
5.2.1.6.2
The minimum transverse balance requirements specified in this section shall be
equaled or exceeded under all reasonable conditions of the application of earth
ground to the equipment or protective circuitry under test.
85
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 4.19(a) – Transverse balance test criteria – Analog voice band
Analog voice band
Longitudinal
termination - RL
Metallic source
impedance - RM
5.2.2
500 ohms
600 ohms
Frequency range
200 Hz – 4 kHz
Metallic voltage for
test - VM
0.775 V
Subrate digital and PSDS Type I interfaces:
Subrate digital TE and public switched digital service (PSDS) Type I TE shall meet the
requirements in this clause for all pulse repetition rates for which the equipment can be
configured. PSDS Type I TE shall meet the requirements in this clause that are applicable to
56 kbps subrate TE.
5.2.2.1
Limitations on terminal equipment connecting to subrate digital services: In
addition to the requirements in subclauses 5.2.2.1.1 and 5.2.2.1.2, subrate TE
shall meet either the PSD and average power requirements in subclauses
5.2.2.1.4 through 5.2.2.1.6 or the output pulse template and average power
requirements in 5.2.2.1.7 and 5.2.2.1.8.
5.2.2.1.1
Pulse repetition rate: The pulse repetition rate shall be synchronous with 2.4,
3.2, 4.8, 6.4, 9.6, 12.8, 19.2, 25.6, 38.4, 56.0, or 72 Kbps per second.
5.2.2.1.2
Encoded analog content: If approved terminal equipment connecting to subrate
services contains an analog-to-digital converter, or generates signals directly in
digital form that are intended for eventual conversion into voice band analog
signals, the encoded analog content of the digital signal shall be limited as
specified in clause 4.5.
5.2.2.1.3
Allowable net amplification between ports: Approved terminal equipment and
approved protective circuitry with provision for transmission between network
interface ports or between ports to other terminal equipment that is separately
approved and network interface ports shall meet the requirements of clause 4.7.
5.2.2.1.4
Equivalent PSD for maximum output: When applied to a 135 ohm resistor, the
instantaneous amplitude of the PSD, obtainable from the registered terminal
equipment, shall not exceed the PSD defined by the following limiting function,
in dBm/Hz:
86
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)


A2 56000
fbaud
  Additional_Attenuation
10 log 
  f  2   f  2  
  f3dB   1   fbaud k   1 
 

 


where “A” is equal to ½ for 9.6 Kbps and 12.8 Kbps or 1 for all other rates,
“fbaud” is equal to the baud rate, “f3dB” is equal to 1.3 times the baud rate times
1.05, “f” is the frequency, and “k” is defined in table 4.7. Additional attenuation
is required at certain baud rates in the bands specified in tables 4.9 and 4.10.
PSD shall be measured for frequencies between ½ the baud rate and 20 times
the baud rate. If 20 times the baud rate is less than 80 kHz, then the upper
frequency measurement bound shall be 80 kHz. The resolution bandwidth for
the PSD shall be less than or equal to 0.1 times the baud rate but no greater
than 3 kHz.
5.2.2.1.5
Average power for non-secondary channel rates: The average output power
when a random signal sequence, (0) or (1) equi-probable in each pulse interval,
is being produced as measured across a 135 ohm resistance shall not exceed
the values shown in table 4.7.
5.2.2.1.6
Average power for secondary channel rates: The customer data shall be a
random signal sequence, (0) or (1) equi-probable in each pulse interval. The
network control bit shall equal 1, and the framing pattern shall be (0) or (1) with
equal probability. The average output power as measured across a 135 ohm
resistance shall not exceed the values shown in table 4.7.
5.2.2.1.7
Template for maximum output pulse: When applied to a 135 ohm resistor, the
instantaneous amplitude of the largest isolated output pulse obtainable from the
approved terminal equipment shall not exceed by more than 10% the
instantaneous voltage defined by a template obtained as follows:
The limiting pulse template shall be determined by passing an ideal 50% duty
cycle rectangular pulse with the amplitude/pulse rate characteristics defined in
table 4.8 through a single real pole low pass filter having a cutoff frequency in
Hz equal to 1.3 times the bit rate. For bit rates of 2.4, 3.2, 4.8, 6.4, 9.6 and 12.8
Kbps, the filtered pulses shall also be passed through a filter providing the
additional attenuation in table 4.9.
The attenuation shown in table 4.9 may be reduced at any frequency within the
band by the weighting curve of table 4.10 provided minimum rejection shall
never be less than 0 dB; i.e., the weight shall not justify gain over the system
without added attenuation.
87
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 4.7 – Values for k and average output power
Line rate (Kbps)
2.4
3.2
4.8
6.4
9.6
12.8
19.2
25.6
38.4
51.2
56
72
72
User data rate
(Kbps)
2.4
2.4 with SC
4.8
4.8 with SC
9.6
9.6 with SC
19.2
19.2 with SC
38.4
38.4 with SC
56
56 with SC
64
Values for k
0.00727798
0.00804454
0.00727798
0.00804454
0.00727798
0.00804454
0.00727798
0.00804454
0.00727798
0.00804454
0.00727798
0.00795272
0.00727798
Maximum average
power (dBm)
6.9
7.4
6.9
7.4
0.9
1.4
6.9
7.4
6.9
7.4
6.9
7.4
6.9
NOTE – SC = Secondary channel
Table 4.8 – Driving pulse amplitude for subrate terminal equipment
Line rate (Kbps)
User data rate (Kbps)
Amplitude (V)
2.4
2.4
1.66
3.2
2.4 with SC
1.66
4.8
4.8
1.66
6.4
4.8 with SC
1.66
9.6
9.6
0.83
12.8
9.6 with SC
0.83
19.2
19.2
1.66
25.6
19.2 with SC
1.66
38.4
38.4
1.66
51.2
38.4 with SC
1.66
56
56
1.66
72
56 with SC
1.66
72
64
1.66
NOTE – SC = Secondary channel.
88
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 4.9 – Minimum additional attenuation for subrate terminal equipment
Line rate (Kbps)
Attenuation in frequency
band 24–32 kHz (dB)
Attenuation in frequency
band 72–80 kHz (dB)
2.4
5
1
3.2
5
1
4.8
13
9
6.4
13
9
9.6
17
8
12.8
17
8
NOTE – The attenuation indicated may be reduced at any frequency within the band by
the weighting curve of table 4.10. Minimum rejection shall never be less than 0 dB; i.e.,
the weight shall not justify gain over the system without added attenuation.
Table 4.10 – Attenuation curve for subrate terminal equipment
5.2.2.1.8
24–32 kHz band
72–80kHz band
Attenuation factor (dB)
24
72
-18
25
73
-3
26
74
-1
27
75
0
28
76
0
29
77
0
30
78
-1
31
79
-3
32
80
-18
Average power: The average output power when a random signal sequence,
(0) or (1) equi-probable in each pulse interval, is being produced as measured
across a 135 ohm resistance shall not exceed 0 dBm for 9.6 and 12.8 Kbps or
+6 dBm for all other rates shown in table 4.8.
89
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.2.2.2
Subrate terminal equipment transverse balance: The minimum transverse
balance requirements for approved subrate terminal equipment shall be equaled
or exceeded for the range of frequencies applicable for the equipment under test
and under all reasonable conditions of the application of earth ground to the
equipment. All such terminal equipment shall have a transverse balance in the
acceptable region of figure 4.14(a) for the range of frequencies shown in table
4.20(b).
The metallic impedance used for the transverse balance measurements for all
subrate equipment shall be 135 ohms, and the metallic test voltage shall be
0.367V (0dBm)
For 0.2 to 12 kHz the longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 500 ohms, and above
12 kHz the longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 90 ohms.
Transverse balance testing is described in TIA TSB-31-C. An illustrative test
circuit for transverse balance conformance testing is shown in figure 4.11. Testing
is done with the TE transmitter turned off.
Table 4.20(b) – Frequency ranges of transverse balance requirements for subrate
equipment
Digital interface
Frequency range
(kHz)
2.4
2.4 + SC
4.8
4.8 + SC
9.6
9.6 + SC (see note)
19.2
19.2 + SC (see note)
38.4
38.4 + SC (see note)
56
56 + SC (see note)
64
PSDS Type I
0.2 to 2.4
0.2 to 3.2
0.2 to 4.8
0.2 to 6.4
0.2 to 9.6
0.2 to 12.8
0.2 to 19.2
0.2 to 25.6
0.2 to 38.4
0.2 to 51.2
0.2 to 56
0.2 to 72
0.2 to 72
0.2 to 72
NOTE – SC = Secondary channel.
90
Longitudinal
termination (RL)
(ohms)
500
500
500
500
500
90 or 500
90 or 500
90 or 500
90 or 500
90 or 500
90 or 500
90 or 500
90 or 500
90 or 500
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Transformer
20 pF
differential
3 pF
RCAL
RL
1:1 impedance ratio, 135 ohms wide-band transformer
Optimally this is a dual-stator air-variable RF capacitor that maintains a
constant capacitance between stators while providing a variable
capacitance from either stator to ground.
Composition RF capacitor
135 ohms
90 or 500 ohms: A non-inductive precision resistor according to table
4.20(b).
NOTE 1 – The 3 pF capacitor may be placed on either line of the test set, as required, to
obtain proper balancing of the bridge.
NOTE 2 – The effective output impedance of the tracking generator should match the
135 ohms test impedance. Differentially balance the spectrum analyzer's input to
measure VM.
Figure 4.11 – Test circuit for subrate transverse balance
91
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Transverse Balance M-L (dB)
60
Acceptable Region
Transverse Balance Req'd (dB)
50
40
35
30
20
Unacceptable Region
10
0
0.2
1
12
1544
Frequency (kHz)
Figure 4.14(a) – Transverse balance requirements for subrate equipment
92
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.2.3
PSDS Type II and Type III Interfaces:
5.2.3.1
Limitations on TE connecting to PSDS (Types II and III): If PSDS (Types II and
III) terminal equipment contains an analog to digital converter, or generates
signals directly in digital form that are intended for eventual conversion into voice
band analog signals, the encoded analog content of the digital signal shall be
limited as specified in clause 4.5.
5.2.3.2
Pulse repetition rate: For PSDS (Type II) the pulse repetition rate shall be a
maximum of (144,000 ±5) pulses per second; for PSDS (Type III) the pulse
repetition rate shall be a maximum of (160,000 ± 5) pulses per second.
93
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.2.3.3
Template for maximum output pulse: When applied to a 135 ohm resistor, the
instantaneous amplitude of the largest isolated output pulse obtainable from the
approved terminal equipment shall fall within the template of PSDS Type II or
PSDS Type III in the table below. The limiting pulse template shall be defined by
passing an ideal 50% duty cycle rectangular pulse within the amplitude/pulse rate
characteristics through a 1-pole low-pass filter with a -3 dB frequency of 260 kHz.
Pulse characteristics template
PSDS Type II
PSDS Type III
Pulse height
2.6 V ± 5%
2.4 V ± 5%
Pulse width
(3472.2 ± 150) ns
(3125 ±100) ns
100 ns
(1.2 ± 0.2) µs
Max rise or fall time
(from 10% to 90% points)
5.2.3.4
PSDS Type II analog mode: PSDS Type II TE shall meet the applicable analog
voice band interface requirements in clause 5.1 when operating in the analog
mode. A circuit simulating the network side of the two-wire telephone connection
is shown in Figure 1.15. Other test circuit configurations may be used provided
they operate at the same DC voltage and current characteristics and AC
impedance characteristics presented in Figure 1.15. When utilized, the simulator
shall be operated over the entire range of loop resistances, and with the indicated
voltage limits and polarity. Whenever the loop current is changed, sufficient time
shall be allowed for the current to reach a steady-state condition before continuing
testing.
Tip
R2
C1
L
R1
+
-
Ring
C1 = 500 µF, (-10, +50%)
R1 = 600 ohms  1%
L  10 H, Resistance = RL
Test conditions for analog mode
V (Volts)
R2 + RL (ohms)
Min
Max
Continuously variable
36
46
610 to 1510
94
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Figure 1.15 – Simulator circuit for PSDS type II in analog mode
5.2.3.5
PSDS terminal equipment transverse balance: The minimum transverse balance
requirements for approved PSDS terminal equipment shall be equaled or
exceeded for the range of frequencies applicable for the equipment under test
and under all reasonable conditions of the application of earth ground to the
equipment. All such equipment shall have a transverse balance in the acceptable
region of figure 4.14c, for the range of frequencies shown in table 4.20(c).
The metallic impedance used for the transverse balance measurements for all
PSDS equipment shall be 135 ohms, and the metallic test voltage shall be 0.367V
(0 dBm)
For 0.2 to 12 kHz the longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 500 ohms, and above
12 kHz the longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 90 ohms.
Transverse balance testing is described in TIA TSB-31-C. An illustrative test
circuit for transverse balance conformance testing is shown in figure 4.11. Testing
is done with the TE transmitter turned off.
Table 4.20(c) – Frequency ranges for PSDS Type II and Type III transverse balance
requirements.
Digital interface
Frequency range
(kHz)
Longitudinal termination
(RL) (ohms)
PSDS Type II
PSDS Type III
0.2 to 144
0.2 to 160
90 or 500
90 or 500
95
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Transformer
20 pF
differential
3 pF
RCAL
RL
1:1 impedance ratio, 135 ohms wide-band transformer
Optimally this is a dual-stator air-variable RF capacitor that
maintains a constant capacitance between stators while providing
a variable capacitance from either stator to ground.
Composition RF capacitor
135 ohms
90 or 500 ohms: This is a non-inductive precision resistor
according to table 4.20(c).
NOTE 1 – The 3 pF capacitor may be placed on either line of the test set, as required, to
obtain proper balancing of the bridge.
NOTE 2 – The effective output impedance of the tracking generator should match the
135 ohms test impedance. Differentially balance the spectrum analyzer's input to
measure VM.
Figure 4.11 – Test circuit for PSDS Type II and Type III transverse balance
96
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Transverse Balance M-L (dB)
60
Acceptable Region
Transverse Balance Req'd (dB)
50
40
35
30
20
Unacceptable Region
10
0
0.2
1
12
1544
Frequency (kHz)
Figure 4.14(c) – Transverse balance requirements for PSDS Type II and Type III TE
97
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.2.4
DS1 and ISDN PRI terminal equipment:
5.2.4.1
Pulse repetition rate: The free running line rate of the transmit signal shall be
1.544 Mbps with a tolerance of ± 32 ppm, i.e., ± 50 bps.
5.2.4.2
Output pulse templates: The approved terminal equipment shall be capable of
optionally delivering three sizes of output pulses. The output pulse option shall be
selectable at the time of installation.
5.2.4.2.1
Option A output pulse: When applied to a 100 ohm resistor, the instantaneous
amplitude of the largest output pulse obtainable from the approved terminal
equipment shall fall within the pulse template illustrated in figure 4.9. The mask
may be positioned horizontally as needed to encompass the pulse, and the
amplitude of the normalized mask may be uniformity scaled to encompass the
pulse. The baseline of the mask shall coincide with the pulse baseline.
The pulse amplitude shall be 2.4 to 3.6 V. (Use constant scaling factor to fit
normalized template.)
5.2.4.2.2
Option B output pulse: When applied to a 100 ohm resistor, the instantaneous
amplitude of the output from the approved terminal equipment obtained when
Option B is implemented shall fall within the pulse template obtained by passing
the bounding pulses permitted by figure 4.9 through the following transfer
function.
Vout
n2 S 2  n1S  n0

Vin d3S 3  d 2 S 2  d1S  d0
where:
n0
n1
n2
d0
d1
d2
d3
S
f
5.2.4.2.3
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
1.6049 x 106
7.9861 x 10-1
9.2404 x 10-8
2.1612 x 106
1.7223
4.575
x 10-7
3.8307 x 10-14
j2πf
frequency (Hz)
Option C output pulse: When applied to a 100 ohm resistor, the instantaneous
amplitude of the output from the approved terminal equipment obtained when
Option C is implemented shall fall within the pulse template obtained by passing
the pulses obtained in Option B through the transfer function in Option B a
second time.
98
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
1.4
1.2
Normalized Amplitude
1.0
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.0
-0.2
-0.4
-0.6
-600
-400
-200
0
200
400
600
800
Time (ns)
Maximum Curve
Nanoseconds (ns)
-500
-250
-175
-175
-75
0
175
220
500
750
Normalized amplitude
0.05
0.05
0.8
1.2
1.2
1.05
1.05
-0.05
0.05
0.05
0
100
150
0.95
0.9
0.5
Minimum Curve
Nanoseconds (ns)
Normalized amplitude
-500 -150 -150 -100
-.05
-.05
0.5
0.9
150
300
396
600
750
-0.45 -0.45 -0.26 -0.05 -0.05
Figure 4.7 – Isolated pulse template and corner points for ISDN PRI and 1.544 Mbps
equipment
99
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.2.4.3
Adjustment of signal voltage: The signal voltage at the network interface shall be
limited so that the range of pulse amplitudes received at the first telephone
company repeater is controlled to ± 4 dB. This limitation shall be achieved by
implementing the appropriate output pulse option as a function of telephone
company cable loss as specified at time of installation.
Cable loss at 772
kHz (dB)
Terminal equipment
Output pulse
Loss at 772 kHz
15 < Loss </= 22
Option A
0
7.5 < Loss </= 15
Option B
7.5
0 < Loss </= 7.5
Option C
15
5.2.4.4
Output power: The output power in a 3-kHz band about 772 kHz when an all
ones signal sequence is being produced as measured across a 100 ohm
terminating resistance shall not exceed +19 dBm. The power in a 3 kHz band
about 1.544 MHz shall be at least 25 dB below that in a 3-kHz band about 772
kHz.
5.2.4.5
Encoded analog content: If approved terminal equipment connected to 1.544
Mbps digital services or ISDN PRI services contains an analog-to-digital
converter, or generates signals directly in digital form that are intended for
eventual conversion into voice band analog signals, the encoded analog content
of the subrate channels within the 1.544 Mbps or ISDN PRI signal shall be limited
as specified in clause 4.5.
5.2.4.6
Unequipped subrate channels: The permissible code words for unequipped
µ-255 encoded subrate channels of terminal equipment connected to 1.544 Mbps
digital services or ISDN PRI shall be limited to those corresponding to signals of
either polarity, of magnitude equal to or less than X48, where code word, XN is
derived by:
XN = (255 – N) base 2
-XN = (127 – N) base 2
5.2.4.7
DS1 and ISDN PRI terminal equipment transverse balance: The minimum
transverse balance requirements for approved DS1 and ISDN PRI terminal
equipment shall be equaled or exceeded for the range of frequencies applicable
for the equipment under test and under all reasonable conditions of the
application of earth ground to the equipment. All such equipment shall have a
transverse balance exceeding 35dB from 12 kHz to 1544 kHz.
The metallic impedance used for the transverse balance measurements for all
DS1 and ISDN PRI equipment shall be 100 ohms, and the metallic test voltage
100
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
shall be 0.316V (0dBm). The longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 90 ohms.
Transverse balance testing is described in TIA TSB-31-C. An illustrative test
circuit for transverse balance conformance testing is shown in figure 4.11. Testing
is done with the TE transmitter turned off.
Transformer
20 pF
differential
3 pF
RCAL
RL
1:1 impedance ratio, 100 ohms wide-band transformer
Optimally this is a dual-stator air-variable RF capacitor that
maintains a constant capacitance between stators while providing
a variable capacitance from either stator to ground.
Composition RF capacitor
100 ohms
90 ohms: This is a non-inductive precision resistor
NOTE 1 – The 3 pF capacitor may be placed on either line of the test set, as required, to
obtain proper balancing of the bridge.
NOTE 2 – The effective output impedance of the tracking generator should match the
100 ohms test impedance. Differentially balance the spectrum analyzer's input to
measure VM.
Figure 4.11 – Test circuit for DS1 and ISDN PRI transverse balance
5.2.4.8
Off-hook signal requirements for approved terminal equipment connecting to
1.544 Mbps digital services: Upon entering the normal off-hook state, in response
to alerting, for subrate channels, approved terminal equipment shall continue to
transmit the signaling bit sequence representing the off-hook state for 5 seconds,
unless the equipment is returned to the on-hook state during the above 5-second
interval.
101
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.2.4.9
Billing protection requirements for direct inward dialing: For approved terminal
equipment, the off-hook state shall be applied within 0.5 seconds of the time that:
5.2.4.9.1
The terminal equipment permits the acceptance of further digits that may be
used to route the incoming call to another destination.
5.2.4.9.2
The terminal equipment transmits signals towards the calling party, except for
the call progress tones, i.e., busy, reorder and audible ring, and the call is:
a) Answered by the called, or another station;
b) Answered by the attendant;
c) Routed to a customer controlled or defined recorded announcement, except
for ‘‘number invalid,’’ ‘‘not in service’’ or ‘‘not assigned;’’
d) Routed to a dial prompt; or
e) Routed back to the public switched telephone network or other destination and
the call is answered. If the status of the answered call cannot be reliably
determined by the terminal equipment through means such as, detection of
answer supervision or voice energy, removal of audible ring, etc., the off-hook
state shall be applied after an interval of not more than 20 seconds from the
time of such routing. The off-hook state shall be maintained for the duration of
the call.
5.2.4.9.3
For approved protective circuitry:
a) Approved protective circuitry shall block transmission incoming from the
network until an off-hook signal is received from the terminal equipment.
b) Approved protective circuitry shall provide an off-hook signal within 0.5
seconds following the receipt of an off-hook signal from the terminal
equipment and shall maintain this off-hook signal for the duration of the call.
5.2.4.10 Allowable net amplification between ports: Approved terminal equipment and
approved protective circuitry with provision for transmission between network
interface ports or between ports to other terminal equipment that is separately
approved and network interface ports shall meet the requirements of clause 4.7.
102
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.3
IDSN & DSL INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS
ISDN and DSL terminal equipment shall be tested while transmitting maximum power and
maximum PSD levels at all frequencies over which the equipment can transmit data when
deployed. Equipment shall be tested under steady state conditions, after all start-up and
initialization procedures have been completed, and while the equipment is transmitting data.
In this Standard, a steady-state condition during signal power tests for a particular mode of
operation occurs when the measured total average powers in distinct 1.25 millisecond time
intervals do not differ by more than 8 dB.
The short-term stationary conformance criteria in 6.5.2 through 6.5.4 of T1.417-2003 shall
be applied to terminal equipment if the total average power transmitted by the EUT in any
two non-overlapping 1.25 millisecond time intervals separated by less than 60 seconds can
differ by more than 8 dB. This includes variation due to the presence or absence of input
data for transmission or the presence of specific input data sequences, but does not include
variations due to external stimuli such as the application of externally controlled power
management, externally initiated retrain, or a change in crosstalk levels or loop conditions
that causes automatic retrain.
Although no specific requirements are specified in this Standard for total average power or
PSD during start-up and other non-data transmission phases, equipment that transmits
inordinately high power or PSD levels during these phases may be considered noncompliant with this Standard.
The terminal equipment input shall consist of a pseudo-random uniformly distributed data
sequence, and the terminal equipment output signal shall be a fully modulated transmitted
signal with all overhead, framing, coding, scrambling, modulation, filtering and all other
operations performed on the data stream that the modem would normally perform while
transmitting data.
ISDN and DSL terminal equipment shall meet the requirements in this section for all modes
of operation for which the equipment can be configured. With respect to signal power
limitations, DSL terminal equipment shall meet the peak PSD and other signal power
requirements corresponding to the mode of operation for which the modem is configured.
103
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.3.1
Basic rate ISDN (ISDN BRI) and IDSL:
5.3.1.1
Signal power limitations:
5.3.1.1.1
If approved terminal equipment connecting to an ISDN BRI or IDSL interface
contains an analog-to-digital converter or generates signals directly in digital
form that are intended for eventual conversion into voice band analog signals,
the encoded analog content of the bearer channels within the ISDN BRI signal
shall be limited as specified in clause 4.5.
5.3.1.1.2
Basic rate ISDN-U, IDSL, and any terminal equipment operating in spectrum
management class 1 (SMC 1) shall operate within the TU-R power spectral
density (PSD) requirements and total average power limits defined in T1.4172003, clauses 5.3.1.1 and 6.1, for SMC 1.
5.3.1.2
Transverse balance limitations: The transverse balance of BRI-U, IDSL, and
SMC 1 terminal equipment shall equal or exceed the values in figure 5.3.2-5 over
the entire range of frequencies defined for BRI-U and ISDL in table 5.3.1-1.
Alternatively, a narrower frequency range may be used that is defined as follows.
The point at which the measured power spectral density is 20 dB down from the
peak PSD value shall determine the upper and lower frequencies.
The metallic impedance used for the transverse balance measurements for BRIU, IDSL, and SMC 1 terminal equipment shall be 135 ohms. The metallic voltage
for test is 0.367 v. For 0.2 to 12 kHz the longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 500
ohms, and above 12 kHz the longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 90 ohms.
Transverse balance testing is described in TIA TSB-31-C, and illustrative test
circuits for transverse balance conformance testing with and without loop
simulator circuits are shown in figure 4.10 and figure 4.11. Testing is done with the
TE transmitter turned off.
Table 5.3.1-1 – Frequency ranges of transverse balance requirements for BRI and
IDSL
Interface
Frequency
range (kHz)
Longitudinal
termination (RL) (ohms)
Metallic termination
(RM) (ohms)
BRI-U
0.2 to 192
90 or 500
135
IDSL
0.2 to 115
90 or 500
135
5.3.1.3
Longitudinal output voltage limitations: IDSL, BRI-U, and SMC 1 terminal
equipment shall meet the longitudinal output voltage limits defined in subclause
5.3.1.3 of T1.417-2003.
104
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.3.2
ADSL, ADSL2, ADSL2+, and reach extended ADSL (READSL) modes:
5.3.2.1
Signal power limitations:
5.3.2.1.1
ADSL, ADSL2, ADSL2+ and reach extended ADSL2 (READSL2) modems shall
operate with an aggregate (total average) power of less than +13.0 dBm into
100 ohms.
5.3.2.1.2
The power spectral density (PSD) for ADSL and ADSL2 modems shall not
exceed the PSD mask as defined by table 5.3.2-1. Figure 5.3.2-1 shows these
requirements.
Table 5.3.2-1 – PSD mask definition for ADSL and ADSL2
Frequency
band (kHz)
Peak PSD
across 100 ohms (see Note 1)
dBm/Hz
RBW
0.2 < f ≤ 4
-97.5
100 Hz
4 < f ≤ 25.875
-92.5+21.5 log2 (f /4)
100 Hz
25.875 < f ≤ 138
-34.5
10 kHz
138 < f ≤ 307
-34.5-48log2 (f /138)
10 kHz
307 < f ≤ 1,221
-90
10 kHz
1221 < f ≤ 1,630
-90
10 kHz
Max power in 1 MHz sliding
window across 100 ohms
dBm
RBW
-30 - 48  log2 (f /1221)
1 MHz
(see Note 2)
1630 < f ≤ 30,000
10 kHz
-90
-50
1 MHz
NOTE 1 – The breakpoint frequencies and PSD values are exact.
NOTE 2 – The equation for the slope is provided for determining the exact power at each
frequency. The equation is derived from the original equation provided in ITU-T G.992.1
Annex A by adding 60 dB to normalize for power using dBm
105
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
NOTE – The dotted line is for reference only. It shows the 1MHz sliding window
maximum power requirement in dBm/Hz.
Figure 5.3.2-1 – ADSL and ADSL2 PSD mask
5.3.2.1.3
The power spectral density (PSD) for ADSL2 and ADSL2+ extended upstream
operation shall not exceed the extended upstream spectral mask (EU-32, EU36, etc.) defined by tables 5.3.2-2, 5.3.2-3 and 5.3.2-4 corresponding to the
extended upstream mode for which the modem is configured. Figure 5.3.2-2
illustrates these requirements.
The pass band is defined as the band from 25.875 kHz to an upper bound
frequency f1. It is the widest possible band used. Limits defined within the pass
band apply also to any narrower bands used.
Table 5.3.2-4 define the alternative family of spectral masks for the transmit
signal. The low-frequency stop-band is defined as frequencies below 25.875
kHz. The high-frequency stop-band is defined as frequencies greater than the
pass band upper bound frequency f1. The “in-band peak PSD,” “PSD_int,” and
the frequencies f1 and f_int shall be as defined in the table for in-band peak
106
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
PSD, PSD_int, and the frequencies f1 and f_int. The breakpoints in the table
shall be connected by linear straight lines on a dB/log(f) plot.
Table 5.3.2-2 – PSD mask definition for ADSL2 and ADSL2+ extended upstream
operation
Frequency (kHz)
0.200
4
4
10
25.875
f1
f_int
686
5275
30000
Peak PSD (dBm/Hz)
across 100 ohms
(see Note 1)
-97.5
-97.5
-92.5
interpolated
In-band_peak_PSD
In-band_peak_PSD
PSD_int
-100
-100
-100
RBW (see Note 2)
100 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
NOTE 1 – The breakpoint frequencies and PSD values are exact.
NOTE 2 – RBW specifies the measurement’s resolution bandwidth. The RBW specified
for a certain breakpoint with frequency fi is applicable for all frequencies satisfying fi < f <
fj, where fj is the frequency of the next specified breakpoint.
Table 5.3.2-3 – Additional PSD mask requirements for extended upstream operation
Frequency (kHz)
1411
1630
5275
30000
PSD level (dBm/Hz)
see note 1
-100
-110
-112
-112
RBW
see note 2
1 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
NOTE 1 – The breakpoint frequencies and PSD values are exact.
NOTE 2 – RBW specifies the measurement’s resolution bandwidth. The RBW specified
for a certain breakpoint with frequency fi is applicable for all frequencies satisfying fi < f <
fj, where fj is the frequency of the next specified breakpoint.
107
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.2-4 – In-band peak PSD, PSD_int, and the frequencies f1 and f_int
Upstream
MaskNumber
Designator
In-band
Peak PSD
(dBm/Hz)
Frequency
f1 (kHz)
Intercept
Frequency
f_int (kHz)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
EU-32
EU-36
EU-40
EU-44
EU-48
EU-52
EU-56
EU-60
EU-64
-34.5
-35.0
-35.5
-35.9
-36.3
-36.6
-36.9
-37.2
-37.5
138.00
155.25
172.50
189.75
207.00
224.25
241.50
258.75
276.00
242.92
274.00
305.16
336.40
367.69
399.04
430.45
461.90
493.41
Intercept
PSD Level
PSD_int
(dBm/Hz)
-93.2
-94.0
-94.7
-95.4
-95.9
-96.5
-97.0
-97.4
-97.9
NOTE – The dotted line is for reference only. It shows the 1MHz sliding window
maximum power requirement in dBm/Hz.
Figure 5.3.2-2 – ADSL2 and ADSL2+ extended upstream operation PSD mask
108
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.3.2.1.4
The power spectral density (PSD) of the signal transmitted by READSL2
terminal equipment shall not exceed the upstream PSD mask defined in tables
5.3.2-5 or 5.3.2-6 corresponding to the READSL2 mode of operation for which
the modem is configured. Figures 5.3.2-3 and 5.3.2-4 illustrate these
requirements.
Table 5.3.2-5 – PSD mask 1 definition for READSL2
Peak PSD
Frequency
across 100 ohms (see Note 1)
band (kHz)
dBm/Hz
RBW
0.2 < f ≤ 4
-97.5
100 Hz
4 < f ≤ 25.875
-92.5+22.13 x log2 (f /4)
100 Hz
25.875 < f ≤ 103.5
-32.9
10 kHz
103.5 < f ≤ 686
max{-32.9 - 72 x log2 (f /103.5),
10 x log10[0.05683 x (f
Max power in 1 MHz sliding
window across 100 ohms
dBm (see Note 2)
RBW
10 kHz
x103) -1.5]}
686 < f ≤ 1,411
-100
10 kHz
1,411 < f ≤ 1,630
-100
10 kHz
-40 - 48  log2 (f /1411)
1 MHz
1,630 < f ≤ 5,275
-100
10 kHz
-50 - 1.18  log2 (f /1630)
1 MHz
5,275 < f ≤ 30,000
-100
10 kHz
-52
1 MHz
NOTE 1 – The breakpoint frequencies and PSD values are exact.
NOTE 2 – The equations for the slopes are provided for determining the exact power at
each frequency. The equations are derived from the original equations provided in ITU-T
G.992.3 Annex L by adding 60 dB to normalize for power using dBm.
109
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.2-6 – PSD mask 2 definition for READSL2
Peak PSD across 100 ohms
Frequency
(see Note 1)
band (kHz)
dBm/Hz
RBW
0.2 < f ≤ 4
-97.5
100 Hz
4 < f ≤ 25.875
-92.5 + 23.43 x log2 (f /4)
100 Hz
25.875 < f ≤ 60.375
-29.4
10 kHz
60.375 < f ≤ 686
max{-29.4 - 72 x log2 (f /60.375),
10 kHz
Max power in 1 MHz sliding
window across 100 ohms
dBm (see Note 2)
RBW
10 x log10[0.05683 x (f x103)-1.5]}
686 < f ≤ 1,411
-100
10 kHz
1,411 < f ≤ 1,630
-100
10 kHz
-40 - 48 x log2 (f /1411)
1 MHz
1,630 < f ≤ 5,275
-100
10 kHz
-50 - 1.18 x log2 (f /1630)
1 MHz
5,275 < f ≤ 30,000
-100
10 kHz
-52
1 MHz
NOTE 1 – The breakpoint frequencies and PSD values are exact.
NOTE 2 – The equations for the slopes are provided for determining the exact power at
each frequency. The equations have not been simplified in order to show all significant
components relevant to the slope. The equations are derived from the original equation
provided in ITU-T G.992.3 Annex L by adding 60 dB to normalize for power using dBm.
110
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
-20
-30
-40
PSD MASK (dBm/Hz)
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
-110
Frequency (kHz)
NOTE – The dotted line is for reference only. It shows the 1MHz sliding window
maximum power requirement in dBm/Hz.
Figure 5.3.2-3 – PSD mask 1 for READSL2
111
30000
5275
1630
1411
686
181.7
103.5
25.875
4
0
-120
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
-20
-30
-40
PSD MASK (dBm/Hz)
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
-110
Frequency (kHz)
NOTE – The dotted line is for reference only. It shows the 1MHz sliding window
maximum power requirement in dBm/Hz.
Figure 5.3.2-4 – PSD mask 2 for READSL2
5.3.2.2
Transverse balance limitations: In addition to meeting the transverse balance
limitations for analog voice band equipment in 5.1.6, ADSL, ADSL2, READSL and
ADSL2+ terminal equipment’s transverse balance shall equal or exceed the
values in figure 5.3.2-5 over the entire range of frequencies as defined in table
5.3.2-7 for ADSL, ADSL2, READSL or ADSL2+ equipment as applicable.
Alternatively, a narrower frequency range may be used that is defined as follows.
The lower frequency shall be determined by the point at which the measured
power spectral density in the upstream band is 20 dB down from the maximum
level associated with the maximum rate upstream signals. The upper frequency
shall be determined by the point at which the measured power spectral density in
the downstream band is 20 dB down from the maximum level associated with the
maximum rate downstream signals.
The metallic impedance used for the transverse balance measurements for ADSL,
ADSL2, READSL and ADSL2+ shall be 100 ohms. The metallic voltage for test is
0.316V. The longitudinal termination shall be 90 ohms (see table 5.3.2-6).
112
30000
5275
1630
1411
686
106
60.375
25.875
4
0
-120
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Transverse balance testing is described in TIA TSB-31-C, and illustrative test
circuits for transverse balance conformance testing with and without loop
simulator circuits are shown in figure 4.10 and figure 4.11. Testing is done with
the TE transmitter turned off.
Table 5.3.2-7 – Frequency ranges of transverse balance requirements for ADSL
equipment operating with POTS
Interface
ADSL
ADSL2
READSL
ADSL2+
Frequency range
(kHz)
13.6 to 1625
13.6 to 1625
13.6 to 1625
13.6 to 2425
Longitudinal
termination (RL)
(ohms)
90
90
90
90
Metallic
termination (RM)
(ohms)
100
100
100
100
Transverse Balance M-L (dB )
45
Acceptable Region
Transverse Balance Requirements (dB)
40
35
30
25
20
15
Unacceptable Region
10
5
0
200 Hz
12 kHz
1.544 MHz
12 MHz 30 MHz
Frequency
Figure 5.3.2-5 – Transverse balance requirements for ADSL and other DSL TE
113
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.3.2.3
Longitudinal output voltage limitations: ADSL, ADSL2, ADSL2+ and READSL2
modems shall meet the voice band longitudinal voltage limitations of 5.1.5.7 as
well as the limitations of 5.1.5.8.3 for a center frequency of 8 kHz, which covers
the frequency span from 4 to 12 kHz. In addition, using the illustrative longitudinal
output voltage measurement circuit in figure 5.3.2-6, ADSL operating with POTS
modems shall limit longitudinal output voltage to the values shown in table 5.3.2-8
below.
Table 5.3.2-8 – Maximum longitudinal output voltage limit for ADSL
10 < f < fb
Maximum longitudinal output voltage (rms) in all 4
KHz bands averaged over a minimum period of 1
second (see Note 3)
-50 dBV (or -51.3 dBV using a 3 kHz bandwidth)
fb < f < 4fb
-80 dBV (or -81.3 dBV using a 3 kHz bandwidth)
Frequency band (kHz)
(see Notes 1 and 2)
NOTE 1 – The first frequency band is the operating band limited by the frequency point fb;
the frequency at which the PSD is approximately 30 dB down from the peak mask value.
For ADSL modems that do not support extended upstream operation, this frequency is
211 kHz, so the maximum frequency to which the longitudinal output voltage is measured
in the upper band is 844 kHz.
NOTE 2 – Alternatively, the measured 30 dB points may be used to define the operating
band’s lower and upper frequency points.
NOTE 3 – The alternative requirements of -51.3 dBV and -81.3 dBV include a -1.3 dB
correction factor associated with using a 3 kHz bandwidth rather than the ideal 4 kHz
bandwidth.
Table 5.3.2-9 – Values of fb for various extended upstream PSD masks operating with
Upstream mask
number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Operating with
POTS designator
EU-32
EU-36
EU-40
EU-44
EU-48
EU-52
EU-56
EU-60
EU-64
fb (kHz)
(see Note)
184
207
230
253
276
299
322
345
368
NOTE – These values apply to extended upstream PSD masks with 72 dB/octave
between f1 and f_int.
114
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
NOTE - All resistor values are in ohms, and resistors are to be matched to better than 0.1%.
Figure 5.3.2-6 – Longitudinal output voltage termination for ADSL TE
[Ed note: Need tolerances - (Roger to find the tolerance. Add capacitor tolerance.]
5.3.2.4 Limitations on equipment intended for operation on loop-start telephone facilities:
Approved terminal equipment that operates over POTS shall conform to the
requirements in subclause 5.1.7.2.
5.3.3
ADSL2 and ADSL2+ all digital mode:
5.3.3.1
ADSL2 and ADSL2+ all digital mode signal power limitations:
5.3.3.1.1
All digital mode shall operate with an aggregate (total average) power not to
exceed +13.4 dBm into 100 ohms.
5.3.3.1.2
The power spectral density (PSD) of the signal transmitted by the ADSL2 all
digital mode shall not exceed the PSD mask (ADLU-32 to ADLU-64) defined in
tables 5.3.3-1 and 5.3.3-2 corresponding to the all digital mode for which the
modem is configured. Figure 5.3.3-1 illustrates these requirements.
115
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.3-1 – PSD mask definition for ADSL2 all digital mode
Peak PSD
Frequency
across 100 ohms (see Note 1)
band (kHz)
dBm/Hz
RBW
0.2 < f ≤ 1.5
-46.5
100 Hz
1.5 < f ≤ 3
-46.5+(In-band peak PSD
100 Hz
Max power in 1 MHz sliding
window across 100 ohms
dBm
RBW
-30 - 48 x log2(f /1221)
1 MHz
+46.5) x log2(f /1.5)
3 < f ≤ f1
In-band Peak PSD
10 kHz
f1 < f ≤ f2
In-band Peak PSD -48 x log2(f /f1)
10 kHz
f2 < f ≤ 1,221
-90
10 kHz
1221 < f ≤ 1,630
-90
10 kHz
(see Note 2)
1630 < f ≤ 30,000
10 kHz
-90
-50
NOTE 1 – The breakpoint frequencies and PSD values are exact.
NOTE 2 – The equation for the slope is provided for determining the exact power at each
frequency. The equation is derived from the original equation provided in ITU-T G.992.3
Appendix J by adding 60 dB to normalize for power using dBm.
Table 5.3.3-2 – In-band peak PSD mask designator for ADSL2 all digital mode
Designator
ADLU – 32
ADLU – 36
ADLU – 40
ADLU – 44
ADLU – 48
ADLU – 52
ADLU – 56
ADLU – 60
ADLU – 64
In-band peak
PSD
(dBm/Hz
-34.5
-35.0
-35.5
-35.9
-36.3
-36.6
-36.9
-37.2
-37.5
116
Frequency f1
(kHz)
Frequency f2
(kHz)
138.00
155.25
172.50
189.75
207.00
224.25
241.50
258.75
276.00
307
343
379
415
450
485
520
554
589
1 MHz
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
-20
-30
-40
PSD MASK (dBm/Hz)
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
-110
Frequency (kHz)
NOTE – The dotted line is for reference only. It shows the 1MHz sliding window
maximum power requirement in dBm/Hz.
Figure 5.3.3-1 – PSD mask for ADSL2 all digital mode.
117
0
00
30
30
16
21
12
f2
f1
3
5
1.
0
-120
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.3.3.1.3
The PSD of the signal transmitted during an ADSL2+ all digital mode shall not
exceed the PSD mask (ADLU-32 to ADLU-64) defined in tables 5.3.3-3, 5.3.3-4
and 5.3.3-4 that corresponds to the ADSL2+ all digital mode for which the
modem is configured.. Figure 5.3.3-2 illustrates these requirements.
Table 5.3.3-3 – PSD mask definition for ADSL2+ all digital mode
Frequency (kHz)
0.2
1.5
3
10
f1
f_int
686
1411
1630
5275
30000
Peak PSD (dBm/Hz) across
100 ohms (see Note 1)
-46.5
-46.5
in-band peak PSD
in-band peak PSD
in-band peak PSD
PSD_int
-100
-100
-100
-100
-100
RBW
see Note 2
100 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
NOTE 1 – The breakpoint frequencies and PSD values are exact.
NOTE 2 – RBW specifies the measurement’s resolution bandwidth. The RBW
specified for a certain breakpoint with frequency fi is applicable for all frequencies
satisfying fi < f ≤ fj, where fj is the frequency of the next specified breakpoint.
Table 5.3.3-4 – Additional PSD mask requirements for ADSL2+ all digital mode
Frequency (kHz)
1411
1630
5275
30000
PSD level (dBm/Hz)
see Note 1
-100
-110
-112
-112
RBW
see Note 2
1 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
1 MHz
NOTE 1 – The breakpoint frequencies and PSD values are exact.
NOTE 2 – RBW specifies the measurement’s resolution bandwidth. The RBW
specified for a certain breakpoint with frequency fi is applicable for all
frequencies satisfying fi < f ≤ fj, where fj is the frequency of the next specified
breakpoint.
118
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.3-5 – In-band peak PSD mask designator for ADSL2+ all digital mode
Designator
In-band peak PSD
(dBm/Hz)
Frequency f1
(kHz)
ADLU - 32
ADLU - 36
ADLU - 40
ADLU - 44
ADLU - 48
ADLU - 52
ADLU - 56
ADLU - 60
ADLU - 64
-34.5
-35.0
-35.5
-35.9
-36.3
-36.6
-36.9
-37.2
-37.5
138.00
155.25
172.50
189.75
207.00
224.25
241.50
258.75
276.00
Intercept
frequency f_int
(kHz)
242.92
274.00
305.16
336.40
367.69
399.04
430.45
461.90
493.41
Intercept PSD
level PSD_int
(dBm/Hz)
-93.2
-94.0
-94.7
-95.4
-95.9
-96.5
-97.0
-97.4
-97.9
-30
-40
PSD MASK (dBm/Hz)
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
-110
-120
0
1.5
3
f1
fint
686
1411
1630
5275
Frequency (kHz)
NOTE – The dotted line is for reference only. It shows the 1MHz sliding window
maximum power requirement in dBm/Hz.
Figure 5.3.3-2 – PSD mask for ADSL2+ all digital mode
119
30000
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.3.3.2
ADSL2 and ADSL2+ all digital mode transverse balance limitations: ADSL2 and
ADSL2+ all digital mode terminal equipment’s transverse balance shall equal or
exceed the values in figure 5.3.2-5 over the entire range of frequencies as defined
in table 5.3.3-6.
Alternatively, a narrower frequency range may be used that is defined as follows.
The lower frequency shall be determined by the point at which the measured
power spectral density in the upstream band is 20 dB down from the maximum
level associated with the maximum rate upstream signals. The upper frequency
shall be determined by the point at which the measured power spectral density in
the downstream band is 20 dB down from the maximum level associated with the
maximum rate downstream signals.
The metallic impedance used for the transverse balance measurements for
ADSL2 and ADSL2+ all digital mode shall be 100 ohms. The metallic voltage for
test is 0.316V. For 0.2 to 12 kHz the longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 500
ohms, and above 12 kHz the longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 90 ohms.
Transverse balance testing is described in TIA TSB-31-C. Illustrative test circuits
for transverse balance conformance testing with and without loop simulator
circuits are shown in figure 4.10 and figure 4.11. Testing is done with the TE
transmitter turned off.
Table 5.3.3-6 – Frequency ranges of transverse balance requirements for ADSL all
digital mode equipment
Interface
Frequency
range (kHz)
Longitudinal termination
(RL) (ohms)
Metallic termination
(RM) (ohms)
ADSL2
0.2 to 2425
90 or 500
100
ADSL2+
0.2 to 2425
90 or 500
100
120
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.3.3.3
ADSL2 and ADSL2+ all digital mode longitudinal output voltage limitations: Using
the illustrative longitudinal output voltage measurement circuit in figure 5.3.2-6,
ADSL all digital mode modems shall limit longitudinal output voltage to the values
shown in the table 5.3.3-7.
Table 5.3.3-7 – Maximum longitudinal output voltage limit for ADSL all digital mode
0.1 < f < fb
Maximum Longitudinal Output Voltage (rms) in
all 4 KHz bands averaged over a minimum
period of 1 second (see Note 3)
-50 dBV (or -51.3 dBV using a 3 kHz bandwidth)
fb < f < 4fb
-80 dBV (or -81.3 dBV using a 3 kHz bandwidth)
Frequency Band (kHz)
(see Notes 1 and 2)
NOTE 1 – The first frequency band is the operating band limited by the frequency point
fb; the frequency at which the PSD is approximately 30 dB down from the peak mask
value.
NOTE 2 – Alternatively, the measured 30 dB points may be used to define the
operating band’s lower and upper frequency points.
NOTE 3 – The alternative requirements of -51.3 dBV and -81.3 dBV include a -1.3 dB
correction factor associated with using a 3 kHz bandwidth rather than the ideal 4 kHz
bandwidth.
Table 5.3.3-8 – Values of fb for various all digital mode extended upstream PSD
masks.
Upstream
All digital mode
fb (kHz)
fb (kHz)
mask-number
designator
(see Note 1)
(see Note 2)
1
ADLU-32
184
213
2
ADLU-36
207
239
3
ADLU-40
230
266
4
ADLU-44
253
293
5
ADLU-48
276
319
6
ADLU-52
299
346
7
ADLU-56
322
372
8
ADLU-60
345
399
9
ADLU-64
368
426
NOTE 1 – These values apply to ADSL2+ all digital mode PSD masks with 72
dB/octave between f1 and f_int.
NOTE 2 – These values apply to ADSL2 all digital mode PSD masks with 48
dB/octave between f1 and f2.
121
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.3.4
SHDSL, ESHDSL:
5.3.4.1
SHDSL, ESHDSL signal power limitations:
5.3.4.1.1
Total power for SHDSL and extended SHDSL (ESDSL) shall not exceed +14
dBm into 135 ohms.
5.3.4.1.2
The power spectral density (PSD) of the signal transmitted by SHDSL shall not
exceed the following PSD mask (SHDSLM(f)):
The in-band PSD for 0 < f < 1.5 MHz shall be measured with a 10 kHz resolution
bandwidth (RBW).
NOTE – Large PSD variations over narrow frequency intervals (for example
near the junction of the main lobe with the noise floor) might require a smaller
resolution bandwidth (RBW) to be used. A good rule of thumb is to choose RBW
such that there is no more than 1 dB change in the signal PSD across the RBW.
2


  f 



sin 

MaskedOffsetdB( f )
K

f
  sym 
1
1
10
 SHDSL 



10
,
f

f
int 
2
12
SHDSL M ( f )   135

f sym
 f 
 f 





1  
f 
f


3
db


 sym 


4
1.5
0.5683 10  f , f int  f  1.1MHz


MaskedOffsetdB(f) is defined as:
f f

1  0.4  3dB
MaskedOffsetdB( f )  
f 3dB

1

,
f  f 3dB
,
f  f 3dB
fint is the frequency where the two functions governing SHDSLM(f) intersect in the
range 0 to fsym. KSHDSL, fsym, f3dB, and the line bit rate LBR are defined in table 5.3.4-1.
At frequencies above 1.1 MHz, the conformance criteria of T1.417-2003 clause 6.1
shall apply with PT(f) = -110 dBm/Hz and PM(f) = -90 dBm/Hz.
122
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.4-1 – SHDSL symmetric PSD parameters
Line Bit Rate LBR (Kbps)
KSHDSL
fsym (ksymbols/s)
f3dB
LBR ≠ 1544 or 1552
LBR = 1544 or 1552
7.86
8.32
LBR / 3
LBR / 3
1.0 x fsym / 2
0.9 x fsym / 2
5.3.4.1.3
The power spectral density (PSD) of the signal transmitted by extended SHDSL
(ESHDSL) shall meet the following requirements:
For symmetric PSDs using 16-TCPAM payload data rates greater than or equal
to 2320 Kbit/s, and for symmetric PSDs using 32-TCPAM payload data rates
greater than or equal to 768 Kbit/s, the measured transmit PSD of each STU-R
shall not exceed the PSD masks specified in this clause (PSDMASKSHDSL(f)).
The in-band PSD for 0 < f < 2.0 MHz shall be measured with a 10 kHz resolution
bandwidth.
NOTE – Large PSD variations over narrow frequency intervals (for example
near the junction of the main lobe with the noise floor) might require a smaller
resolution bandwidth (RBW) to be used. A good rule of thumb is to choose
RBW such that there is no more than 1 dB change in the signal PSD across the
RBW.
For all values of framed data rate available in the STU-R, the following set of
PSD masks (PSDMASKSHDSL(f)) shall be selectable:
PSDMASK SHDSL( f ) 
2

  f  


sin 

MaskedOffsetdB( f )
K
Nf
sym

1
1



10
 SHDSL 



10
, f  f int
2
2  Order
f sym
 135
 f 
 f 



1  

 Nf 
f
3
dB



 sym 
 90 dBm/Hz peak , with max power in the [ f , f  1 MHz] window of

4
1.5
f int  f  3.184 MHz
[10 log 10 (0.5683  10  f )  90] dBm ,
 90 dBm/Hz peak , with max power in the [ f , f  1 MHz] window of

 50 dBm ,
3.184 MHz  f  12 MHz
123
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
where MaskOffsetdB(f) is defined as:
f 3 dB  f

, f  f 3 dB
1  0.4 
f 3 dB
MaskOffsetdB f   
1 dB ,
f  f 3 dB

fint is the frequency where the two functions governing PSDMASKSHDSL(f) intersect in the
range 0 to fsym. KSHDSL, Order, N, fsym, and f3dB are defined in tables 5.3.4-2 and 5.3.4-3.
R is the payload bit rate. The variables f, fsym, fint, and f3dB in the equations are in units of
Hz.
Table 5.3.4-2 – Symmetric PSD parameters, 16-TCPAM
Payload bit rate,
R (Kbit/s)
2320  R  3840
KSHDS
L
7.86
Order
N
6
1
fsym
(ksymbol/s)
(R + 8)/3
f3 dB
1.0 × fsym/2
Table 5.3.4-3 – Symmetric PSD parameters, 32-TCPAM
Payload bit rate,
R (Kbit/s)
KSHDSL
Order
N
fsym
(ksymbol/s)
f3dB
768  R  5696
7.86
6
1
(R + 8)/4
1.0 × fsym/2
NOTE – The criteria for extended SHDSL (ESHDSL) are derived from ITU-T
Recommendation G.991.2 (2003), Annex F.
5.3.4.2
SHDSL, ESHDSL transverse balance limitations: SHDSL and ESHDSL
equipment’s transverse balance shall equal or exceed the values in figure 5.3.2-5
over the entire range of frequencies as defined in table 5.3.4-4.
Alternatively, a narrower frequency range may be used that is defined as follows.
The point at which the measured power spectral density is 20 dB down from the
maximum level associated with the maximum bit rate signals shall determine the
upper and lower frequencies.
The metallic impedance used for the transverse balance measurements for
SHDSL and ESHDSL shall be 135 ohms. The metallic voltage for test is 0.367V.
For 0.2 to 12 kHz the longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 500 ohms, and above
12 kHz the longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 90 ohms.
Transverse balance testing is described in TIA TSB-31-C. Illustrative test circuits
for transverse balance conformance testing with and without loop simulator
circuits are shown in figure 4.10 and figure 4.11. Testing is done with the TE
transmitter turned off.
124
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.4-4 – Frequency ranges of transverse balance requirements for SHDSL and
ESHDSL equipment
Interface
Frequency range
(kHz)
Longitudinal termination
(RL) (ohms)
SHDSL
0.2 to 490
90 or 500
135
ESHDSL
0.2 to 761
90 or 500
135
5.3.4.3
Metallic termination
(RM) (ohms)
SHDSL, ESHDSL longitudinal output voltage limitations: Using the illustrative
longitudinal output voltage measurement circuit in figure 5.3.4-1, SHDSL and
ESHDSL equipment shall limit longitudinal output voltage to the values shown in
the table 5.3.4-5.
For this requirement, the operating band is the range of frequencies between the
upper and lower -30 dB points (relative to peak PSD) of the signal pass band as
determined from the PSD masks defined in 5.3.4.1.2 and 5.3.4.1.3. There is no
requirement for frequencies below the operating band.
Table 5.3.4-5 – Maximum longitudinal output voltage limit for SHDSL and ESHDSL
Applicable frequency range
Maximum longitudinal output voltage (rms) in
all 4 KHz bands averaged over a minimum
period of 1 second (see Note)
Operating band
-50 dBV (or -51.3 dBV using a 3 kHz bandwidth)
From upper -30 dB (relative to
peak PSD) frequency to 4 ×
the upper -30 dB frequency
-80 dBV (or -81.3 dBV using a 3 kHz bandwidth)
NOTE – The alternative requirements of -51.3 dBV and -81.3 dBV include a -1.3 dB
correction factor associated with using a 3 kHz bandwidth rather than the ideal 4 kHz
bandwidth.
[Ed note: Need to add same tolerance and matching information?]
125
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Figure 5.3.4-1 – Longitudinal output voltage termination for SHDSL and ESHDSL
5.3.5
HDSL2 and SMC4:
5.3.5.1
SMC4 signal power limitations: Spectrum management class 4 (SMC4) terminal
equipment shall operate within the TU-R power spectral density (PSD)
requirements and total average power limits defined in T1.417-2003, subclauses
5.3.4.6 and 6.2.4.
5.3.5.2
HDSL2 signal power limitations:
5.3.5.2.1
The total average transmit power (into 135 ohms) below 350 KHz shall not
exceed 17 dBm. The total power may be tested while span powered or locally
powered as required by the intended application of the TE. For span powered
applications, if the TE is a TU-R, the test shall be performed with power (DC
voltage) applied at the loop interface (tip/ring) by an external voltage source
feeding through an AC blocking impedance. The test circuit must contain
provisions for DC power feed and possibly transformer isolation for the
measurement instrumentation. Note that the DC current source/sink must
present a high impedance (at the frequencies) to common ground.
126
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.3.5.2.2
The power spectral density (PSD) of the HDSL2 transmit signal shall not exceed
the upstream PSD mask defined in table 5.3.6-1 and figure 5.3.6-1.
Table 5.3.6-1 – HDSL2 upstream operation PSD mask limits
Frequency
(kHz)
PSD
(dBm/Hz)
Frequency
(kHz)
PSD
(dBm/Hz)
Frequency
(kHz)
PSD
(dBm/Hz)
≤1
-54.2
220
-34.4
426
-90
2
-42.1
255
-34.4
30000
-90
10
-37.8
276
-41.1
175
-37.8
300
-77.6
Figure 5.3.6-1 – Illustrated HDSL2 upstream operation PSD mask
127
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.3.5.3
HDSL2 and SMC4 transverse balance limitations: The transverse balance shall
equal or exceed the values in figure 5.3.2-5 over the entire range of frequencies
as defined in table 5.3.5-1.
Alternatively, a narrower frequency range may be used that is defined as follows.
The point at which the measured power spectral density is 20 dB down from the
maximum level associated with the maximum bit rate signals shall determine the
upper and lower frequencies.
The metallic impedance used for the transverse balance measurements for
HDSL2 and SMC4 shall be 135 ohms. The metallic voltage for test is 0.367V. For
0.2 to 12 kHz the longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 500 ohms, and above 12
kHz the longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 90 ohms.
Transverse balance testing is described in TIA TSB-31-C. Illustrative test circuits
for transverse balance conformance testing with and without loop simulator
circuits are shown in figure 4.10 and figure 4.11. Testing is done with the TE
transmitter turned off.
Table 5.3.5-1 – Frequency ranges of transverse balance requirements for HDSL2
and SMC4
Interface
Frequency
range (kHz)
Longitudinal termination
(RL) (ohms)
Metallic termination
(RM) (ohms)
SMC4
0.2 to 422
90 or 500
135
HDSL2
0.2 to 422
90 or 500
135
128
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.3.5.4
HDSL2 and SMC4 longitudinal output voltage limitations: Using the illustrative
longitudinal output voltage measurement circuit in figure 5.3.6-2, HDSL2 and
SMC4 equipment shall limit longitudinal output voltage to the values shown in
table 5.3.6-3. For this requirement, the operating band is the range of frequencies
between the upper and lower -30 dB points (relative to peak PSD) of the signal
pass band as determined from the PSD mask defined in 5.3.5.2.2. There is no
requirement for frequencies below the operating band.
Table 5.3.6-3 – Maximum longitudinal output voltage limit for HDSL2 and SMC4
Applicable frequency range
Operating band
From upper -30 dB (relative to
peak PSD) frequency to 4 times
the upper -30 dB frequency
Maximum longitudinal output voltage (rms) in
all 4 KHz bands averaged over a minimum
period of 1 second (see note)
-50 dBV (or -51.3 dBV using a 3 kHz bandwidth)
-80 dBV (or -81.3 dBV using a 3 kHz bandwidth)
NOTE – The alternative requirements of -51.3 dBV and -81.3 dBV include a -1.3 dB
correction factor associated with using a 3 kHz bandwidth rather than the ideal 4 kHz
bandwidth.
Figure 5.3.6-2 – Longitudinal output voltage termination for HDSL2 and SMC4
129
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.3.6
HDSL4:
5.3.6.1
HDSL4 signal power limitations:
5.3.6.1.1
The total upstream signal power transmitted by HDSL4 below 307 kHz shall not
exceed 14.6 dBm, where the termination impedance is 135 ohms.
5.3.6.1.2
The power spectral density (PSD) of the HDSL4 transmit signal shall not exceed
the upstream PSD mask defined in table 5.3.7-1 and figure 5.3.7-1.
Table 5.3.7-1 – HDSL4 upstream operation PSD mask limits
Frequency band
(kHz)
PSD (dBm/Hz)
0 < f < 0.2
-47.5
0.2 < f < 2
-37.5 + 10(f-2)/1.8
2<f<5
-33.5 + 4(f-5)/3
5 < f < 50
-33.5
50 < f < 125
-33.5 - ((f-50)75)
125 < f < 130
-34.5
130 < f < 307
-34.5 - 142 x
log10(f/130)
307 < f < 30000
-90
130
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Figure 5.3.7-1 – HDSL4 upstream operation PSD mask
5.3.6.2
HDSL4 transverse balance limitations: The transverse balance of HDSL4
equipment shall equal or exceed the values in figure 5.3.2-5 over the entire range
of frequencies as defined in table 5.3.6-1.
Alternatively, a narrower frequency range may be used that is defined as follows.
The point at which the measured power spectral density is 20 dB down from the
maximum level associated with the maximum bit rate signals shall determine the
upper and lower frequencies.
The metallic impedance used for the transverse balance measurements for
HDSL4 shall be 135 ohms. The metallic voltage for test is 0.367V. For 0.2 to 12
kHz the longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 500 ohms, and above 12 kHz the
longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 90 ohms.
Transverse balance testing is described in TIA TSB-31-C. Illustrative test circuits
for transverse balance conformance testing with and without loop simulator
circuits are shown in figure 4.10 and figure 4.11. Testing is done with the TE
transmitter turned off.
131
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.6-1 – Frequency ranges of transverse balance requirements for HDSL4
Interface
Frequency range
(kHz)
Longitudinal termination
(RL) (ohms)
Metallic termination
(RM) (ohms)
HDSL4
0.2 to 494
90 or 500
135
5.3.6.3
HDSL4 longitudinal output voltage limitations: Using the illustrative longitudinal
output voltage measurement circuit in figure 5.3.7-2 HDSL4 equipment shall limit
longitudinal output voltage to the values shown in table 5.3.7-3.
For this requirement, the operating band is the range of frequencies between the
upper and lower -30 dB points (relative to peak PSD) of the signal pass band as
determined from the PSD mask defined in 5.3.6.1.2. There is no requirement for
frequencies below the operating band.
Table 5.3.7-3 – Maximum longitudinal output voltage limit for HDSL4
Applicable frequency range
Operating band
From upper -30 dB (relative to
peak PSD) frequency to 4 times
the upper -30 dB frequency
Maximum longitudinal output voltage (rms)
in all 4 KHz bands averaged over a minimum
period of 1 second (see note)
-50 dBV (or -51.3 dBV using a 3 kHz bandwidth)
-80 dBV (or -81.3 dBV using a 3 kHz bandwidth)
NOTE – The alternative requirements of -51.3 dBV and -81.3 dBV include a -1.3 dB
correction factor associated with using a 3 kHz bandwidth rather than the ideal 4 kHz
bandwidth.
Figure 5.3.7-2 – Longitudinal output voltage termination for HDSL4
132
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.3.7
SDSL:
5.3.7.1
SDSL signal power limitations:
5.3.7.1.1
Total power for 2B1Q SDSL shall not exceed +14 dBm into 135 ohms.
5.3.7.1.2
The power spectral density (PSD) of the signal transmitted by the 2B1Q SDSL
transmitter shall follow the following equation:
2
  f

sin 


f
2.7  2.7
1
sym 


 
SDSLu ( f ) 
8
135  f sym  f



f sym 



f

 1 

 240 f 

sym 
 392

Where fsym is the symbol rate (which is equal to one-half of the line bit rate)
5.3.7.2
SDSL transverse balance limitations: 2B1Q SDSL equipment’s transverse
balance shall equal or exceed the values in figure 5.3.2-5 over the entire range of
frequencies as defined in table 5.3.7-1.
Alternatively, a narrower frequency range may be used that is defined as follows.
The point at which the measured power spectral density is 20 dB down from the
maximum level associated with the maximum bit rate signals shall determine the
upper and lower frequencies.
The metallic impedance used for the transverse balance measurements for 2B1Q
SDSL shall be 135 ohms. The metallic voltage for test is 0.367V. For 0.2 to 12
kHz the longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 500 ohms, and above 12 kHz the
longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 90 ohms.
Transverse balance testing is described in TIA TSB-31-C. Illustrative test circuits
for transverse balance conformance testing with and without loop simulator
circuits are shown in figure 4.10 and figure 4.11. Testing is done with the TE
transmitter turned off.
133
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.7-1 – Frequency ranges of transverse balance requirements for 2B1Q SDSL
Interface
Frequency range
(kHz)
Longitudinal
termination (RL) (ohms)
Metallic termination
(RM) (ohms)
2B1Q SDSL
0.2 to 575
90 or 500
135
NOTE – The stop-band frequency for 2B1Q SDSL was determined at the maximum bit
rate.
5.3.7.3
SDSL longitudinal output voltage limitations: Using the illustrative longitudinal
output voltage measurement circuit in figure 5.3.4-1, SDSL equipment shall limit
longitudinal output voltage to the values shown in the table 5.3.7-2.
For this requirement, the operating band is the range of frequencies between the
upper and lower -30 dB points (relative to peak PSD) of the signal pass band
defined by the equation in 5.3.7.1.2 (SDSLu(f)). There is no requirement for
frequencies below the operating band.
Table 5.3.7-2 – Maximum longitudinal output voltage limit for SDSL
Applicable frequency range
Maximum longitudinal output voltage (rms) in all
4 kHz bands averaged over a minimum period of
1 second (see note)
Operating band
-50 dBV (or -51.3 dBV using a 3 kHz bandwidth)
From upper -30 dB (relative to
peak PSD) frequency to 4 times
the upper -30 dB frequency
-80 dBV (or -81.3 dBV using a 3 kHz bandwidth)
NOTE – The alternative requirements of -51.3 dBV and -81.3 dBV include a -1.3 dB
correction factor associated with using a 3 kHz bandwidth rather than the ideal 4 kHz
bandwidth.
134
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.3.8
SMC6, VDSL and VDSL2:
5.3.8.1
SMC6, VDSL and VDSL2 signal power limitations:
5.3.8.1.1
The maximum aggregate upstream transmit power in any SMC6, VDSL or
VDSL2 operating mode shall not exceed +14.5 dBm into 100 ohms.
5.3.8.1.2
Spectrum management class 6 (SMC 6) shall operate within the TU-R power
spectral density (PSD) requirements defined in T1.417-2003, subclauses 5.3.6.1
and 6.2.6.
5.3.8.1.3
The transmitted power spectral density for VDSL [QAM/DMT] operation shall not
exceed the upstream PSD masks defined in the following tables for the VDSL
mode of operation for which the modem is configured. The modem must be
tested at least at the maximum data rate which the modem is capable of
operating. Table 5.3.9-1 associated with figure 5.3.9-1 defines the PSD mask
for VDSL operation.
Table 5.3.9-1 – VDSL [QAM/DMT] upstream operation PSD mask limits.
Frequency
(kHz)
0.2 – 4
25
138
307
368
3655
3750
3751
5199
5200
5287
8412
8500
8501
11999
12000
12087
30000
PSD level (dBm/Hz)
-97.5
-34.5
-34.5
-86.5
-90
-90
-76.5
-49.5
-49.5
-76.5
-90
-90
-76.5
-50.5
-50.5
-76.5
-90
-90
135
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Figure 5.3.9-1 – VDSL upstream operation PSD mask
5.3.8.1.4
The transmitted PSD for VDSL2 over POTS (plain old telephone service) and
VDSL2 all digital mode operation shall not exceed the upstream PSD masks
defined in the following tables (based on Annex A of ITU-T G.993.2, Amendment
1) for the VDSL2 mode of operation for which the modem is configured..
Tables 5.3.8-2, 5.3.8-3, 5.3.8-4, 5.3.8-5 and 5.3.8-6 define the PSD masks for
VDSL2 operation over POTS. Figures 5.3.8-2, 5.3.8-3, 5.3.8-4, 5.3.8-5, 5.3.8-6
and 5.3.8-7 show these requirements.
Tables 5.3.8-7, 5.3.8-8, 5.3.8-9, 5.3.8-10 and 5.3.8-11 define the PSD masks for
VDSL2 all digital mode operation. Figures 5.3.8-8, 5.3.8-9, 5.3.8-10, 5.3.8-11,
5.3.8-12 and 5.3.8-13 show these requirements.
136
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.8-2 – VDSL2 profiles 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d, 12a, 12b, and 17a upstream operation
over POTS PSD mask limits
Frequency
(kHz)
PSD level (dBm/Hz) for
profiles 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d
across 100 ohms
PSD level (dBm/Hz) for
profiles 12a, 12b, 17a
across 100 ohms
RBW
0.200
-97.5
-97.5
100 Hz
4
-97.5
-97.5
100 Hz
4
-92.5
-92.5
100 Hz
25.875
PSD1
PSD1
10 kHz
fOH
PSD1
PSD1
10 kHz
f_int
PSD_int
PSD_int
10 kHz
686
-100
-100
10 kHz
3575
-100
-100
10 kHz
3750
-80
-80
10 kHz
3750
-49.5
-49.5
10 kHz
5200
-49.5
-49.5
10 kHz
5200
-80
-80
10 kHz
5375
-100
-100
10 kHz
8375
-100
-100
10 kHz
8500
-100
-80
10 kHz
8500
-100
-50.5
10 kHz
12000
-100
-50.5
10 kHz
12000
-100
-80
10 kHz
12175
-100
-100
10 kHz
30000
-100
-100
10 kHz
137
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.8-3 – VDSL2 upstream operation over POTS PSD1, PSD_int, and the
frequencies fOH and f_int
242.92
274.00
305.16
336.40
367.69
399.04
430.45
461.90
493.41
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
-110
-120
00
138.00
155.25
172.50
189.75
207.00
224.25
241.50
258.75
276.00
Intercept
PSD level
PSD_int
(dBm/Hz)
-93.2
-94.0
-94.7
-95.4
-95.9
-96.5
-97.0
-97.4
-97.9
3 00
-34.5
-35.0
-35.5
-35.9
-36.3
-36.6
-36.9
-37.2
-37.5
5 20
0
5 37
5
EU-32
EU-36
EU-40
EU-44
EU-48
EU-52
EU-56
EU-60
EU-64
3 57
5
3 75
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
6 86
Intercept
frequency
f_int (kHz)
fo h
f_ i
nt
Frequency
f0H (kHz)
2 5. 4
8 75
PSD1
(dBm/Hz)
0 .2
Designator
PSD MASK (dBm/Hz)
Upstream
masknumber
Frequency (kHz)
Figure 5.3.8-2 – VDSL2 profiles 8a, 8b, 8c and 8b upstream operation over POTS PSD
mask
138
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
-30
PSD MASK (dBm/Hz)
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
-110
00
3 00
1 20
1 21 00
75
8 37
8 50 5
0
5 20
5 37 0
5
3 57
3 75 5
0
fo
f_ i h
nt
6 86
0 .2
2 5. 4
8 75
-120
Frequency (kHz)
Figure 5.3.8-3 – VDSL2 profiles 12a, 12b and 17a upstream operation over POTS PSD
mask
139
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.8-4 – VDSL2 profile 30a upstream operation over POTS PSD mask limits
Frequency
(kHz)
PSD level (dBm/Hz)
for profile 30a across
100 ohms
RBW
0.200
-97.5
100 Hz
4
-97.5
100 Hz
4
-92.5
100 Hz
25.875
PSD1
10 kHz
fOH
PSD1
10 kHz
f_int
PSD_int
10 kHz
686
-100
10 kHz
3575
-100
10 kHz
3750
-80
10 kHz
3750
-49.5
10 kHz
5200
-49.5
10 kHz
5200
-80
10 kHz
5375
-100
10 kHz
8375
-100
10 kHz
8500
-80
10 kHz
8500
-50.5
10 kHz
12000
-50.5
10 kHz
12000
-80
10 kHz
12175
-100
10 kHz
21250
-100
10 kHz
23000
-80
10 kHz
23000
-56.5
10 kHz
30000
-56.5
10 kHz
30000
-80
10 kHz
30175
-110
10 kHz
140
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
PSD MASK (dBm/Hz)
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
-110
3 00
3 01 00
75
1 20
1 21 00
75
2 12
50
2 30
00
8 37
8 50 5
0
5 20
5 37 0
5
3 57
3 75 5
0
6 86
fo
f_ i h
nt
0 .2
2 5. 4
8 75
-120
Frequency (kHz)
Figure 5.3.8-4 – VDSL2 profile 30a upstream operation over POTS PSD mask
141
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.8-5 – VDSL2 EU-128 profiles 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d, 12a, 12b and 17a upstream
operation over POTS PSD mask limits
Frequency
(kHz)
PSD level (dBm/Hz) for
profiles 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d
across 100 ohms
PSD level (dBm/Hz) for
profiles 12a, 12b, 17a
across 100 ohms
RBW
0.200
−97.5
−97.5
100 Hz
4
−97.5
−97.5
100 Hz
4
−92.5
−92.5
100 Hz
25.875
−34.5
−34.5
10 kHz
138
−34.5
−34.5
10 kHz
552
-40.6
-40.6
10 kHz
989
−100
−100
10 kHz
1104
−100
−100
10 kHz
3575
−100
−100
10 kHz
3750
−80
−80
10 kHz
3750
−49.5
−49.5
10 kHz
5200
−49.5
−49.5
10 kHz
5200
−80
−80
10 kHz
5375
−100
−100
10 kHz
8375
−100
−100
10 kHz
8500
−100
−80
10 kHz
8500
−100
−50.5
10 kHz
12000
−100
−50.5
10 kHz
12000
−100
−80
10 kHz
12175
−100
−100
10 kHz
2125
−100
−100
10 kHz
23000
−100
−100
10 kHz
23000
−100
−100
10 kHz
30000
−100
−100
10 kHz
30000
−110
−110
10 kHz
30175
−110
−110
10 kHz
142
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
-30
PSD MASK (dBm/Hz)
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
-110
3 00
3 01 00
75
5 20
5 37 0
5
3 57
3 75 5
0
5 52
98
1 109
4
1 38
0 .2
2 5. 4
8 75
-120
Frequency (kHz)
Figure 5.3.8-5 – VDSL2 EU-128 profiles 8a, 8b, 8c and 8b upstream operation over
POTS PSD mask
PSD MASK (dBm/Hz)
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
-110
3 00
3 01 00
75
1 20
1 21 00
75
8 37
8 50 5
0
5 20
5 37 0
5
3 57
3 75 5
0
5 52
9 89
1 38
0 .2
2 5. 4
8 75
-120
Frequency (kHz)
Figure 5.3.8-6 – VDSL2 EU-128 profiles 12a, 12b and 17a upstream operation over
POTS PSD mask
143
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.8-6 – VDSL2 EU-128 profile 30a upstream operation over POTS PSD mask
limits
Frequency
(kHz)
PSD level (dBm/Hz)
for profile 30a
across 100 ohms
RBW
0.200
−97.5
100 Hz
4
−97.5
100 Hz
4
−92.5
100 Hz
25.875
−34.5
10 kHz
138
−34.5
10 kHz
552
-40.6
10 kHz
989
−100
10 kHz
1104
−100
10 kHz
3575
−100
10 kHz
3750
−80
10 kHz
3750
−49.5
10 kHz
5200
−49.5
10 kHz
5200
−80
10 kHz
5375
−100
10 kHz
8375
−100
10 kHz
8500
−80
10 kHz
8500
−50.5
10 kHz
12000
−50.5
10 kHz
12000
−80
10 kHz
12175
−100
10 kHz
21250
−100
10 kHz
23000
−80
10 kHz
23000
−56.5
10 kHz
30000
−56.5
10 kHz
30000
−80
10 kHz
30175
−110
10 kHz
144
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
-30
PSD MASK (dBm/Hz)
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
-110
3 00
3 01 00
75
1 20
1 21 00
75
2 12
50
2 30
00
8 37
8 50 5
0
5 20
5 37 0
5
3 57
3 75 5
0
5 52
9 89
1 38
0 .2
2 5. 4
8 75
-120
Frequency (kHz)
Figure 5.3.8-7 – VDSL2 EU-128 profile 30a upstream operation over POTS PSD mask
145
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.8-7 – VDSL2 profiles 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d, 12a, 12b and 17a upstream all digital
mode operation PSD mask limits
Frequency
(kHz)
PSD level (dBm/Hz) for
profile 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d
across 100 ohms
PSD level (dBm/Hz) for
profiles 12a, 12b, 17a
across 100 ohms
RBW
0.200
1.5
3
fOH
f_int
686
3575
3750
3750
5200
5200
5375
8375
8500
8500
12000
12000
12175
30000
-46.5
-46.5
PSD1
PSD1
PSD_int
-100
-100
-80
-49.5
-49.5
-80
-100
-100
-100
-100
-100
-100
-100
-100
-46.5
-46.5
PSD1
PSD1
PSD_int
-100
-100
-80
-49.5
-49.5
-80
-100
-100
-80
-50.5
-50.5
-80
-100
-100
100 Hz
100 Hz
100 Hz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
10 kHz
Table 5.3.8-8 – VDSL2 upstream all digital mode operation PSD1, PSD_int, and the
frequencies fOH and f_int
Upstream
masknumber
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Designator
PSD1
(dBm/Hz)
Frequency
f0H (kHz)
ADLU-32
ADLU-36
ADLU-40
ADLU-44
ADLU-48
ADLU-52
ADLU-56
ADLU-60
ADLU-64
−34.5
−35.0
−35.5
−35.9
−36.3
−36.6
−36.9
−37.2
−37.5
138.00
155.25
172.50
189.75
207.00
224.25
241.50
258.75
276.00
146
Intercept
frequency
f_int (kHz)
242.92
274.00
305.16
336.40
367.69
399.04
430.45
461.90
493.41
Intercept PSD
level PSD_int
(dBm/Hz)
−93.2
−94.0
−94.7
−95.4
−95.9
−96.5
−97.0
−97.4
−97.9
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
PSD MASK (dBm/Hz)
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
-110
00
3 00
5 20
5 37 0
5
3 57
3 75 5
0
6 86
fo
f_i h
nt
3
0 .2
1 .5
-120
Frequency (kHz)
Figure 5.3.8-8 – VDSL2 profiles 8a, 8b, 8c and 8d upstream all digital mode operation
PSD mask
PSD MASK (dBm/Hz)
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
-110
00
3 00
1 20
1 21 00
75
8 37
8 50 5
0
5 20
5 37 0
5
3 57
3 75 5
0
6 86
fo h
f_i
nt
0 .2
00
1 .5
3
-120
Frequency (kHz)
Figure 5.3.8-9 – VDSL2 profiles 12a, 12b and 17a upstream all digital mode operation
PSD mask
147
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.8-9 – VDSL2 profile 30a upstream all digital mode operation PSD mask limits
Frequency
(kHz)
PSD level (dBm/Hz)
for profile 30a
across 100 ohms
RBW
0.200
-46.5
100 Hz
1.5
-46.5
100 Hz
3
PSD1
100 Hz
fOH
PSD1
10 kHz
f_int
PSD_int
10 kHz
686
-100
10 kHz
3575
-100
10 kHz
3750
-80
10 kHz
3750
-49.5
10 kHz
5200
-49.5
10 kHz
5200
-80
10 kHz
5375
-100
10 kHz
8375
-100
10 kHz
8500
-80
10 kHz
8500
-50.5
10 kHz
12000
-50.5
10 kHz
12000
-80
10 kHz
12175
-100
10 kHz
21250
-100
10 kHz
23000
-80
10 kHz
23000
-56.5
10 kHz
30000
-56.5
10 kHz
30000
-80
10 kHz
30175
-110
10 kHz
148
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
PSD MASK (dBm/Hz)
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
-110
3 00
3 01 00
75
2 12
2 30 50
00
1 20
1 21 00
75
8 37
8 50 5
0
5 20
5 37 0
5
3 57
3 75 5
0
fo h
f_i
nt
6 86
0 .2
00
1 .5
3
-120
Frequency (kHz)
Figure 5.3.8-10 – VDSL2 profile 30a upstream all digital mode operation PSD mask
149
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.8-10 – VDSL2 EU-128 profiles 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d, 12a, 12b and 17a upstream all
digital mode operation mask limits
Frequency
(kHz)
PSD level (dBm/Hz) for
profiles 8a, 8b, 8c, 8d
across 100 ohms
PSD level (dBm/Hz) for
profiles 12a, 12b, 17a
across 100 ohms
RBW
0.200
−46.5
−46.5
100 Hz
1.5
−46.5
−46.5
100 Hz
3
−34.5
−34.5
100 Hz
138
−34.5
−34.5
10 kHz
552
-40.6
-40.6
10 kHz
989
−100
−100
10 kHz
1104
−100
−100
10 kHz
3575
−100
−100
10 kHz
3750
−80
−80
10 kHz
3750
−49.5
−49.5
10 kHz
5200
−49.5
−49.5
10 kHz
5200
−80
−80
10 kHz
5375
−100
−100
10 kHz
8375
−100
−100
10 kHz
8500
−100
−80
10 kHz
8500
−100
−50.5
10 kHz
12000
−100
−50.5
10 kHz
12000
−100
−80
10 kHz
12175
−100
−100
10 kHz
2125
−100
−100
10 kHz
23000
−100
−100
10 kHz
23000
−100
−100
10 kHz
30000
−100
−100
10 kHz
30000
−110
−110
10 kHz
30175
−110
−110
10 kHz
150
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
-20
-30
PSD MASK (dBm/Hz)
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
-110
30
30000
17
5
52
5300
75
0.2
1.5
3
13
558
92
1189
04
35
3775
50
-120
Fre que ncy (kHz)
Figure 5.3.8-11 – VDSL2 EU-128 profiles 8a, 8b, 8c and 8d upstream all digital mode
operation PSD mask
-20
PSD MASK (dBm/Hz)
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
-110
30
0
30 00
17
5
12
12000
17
5
83
8575
00
52
0
53 0
75
0.2
1.5
3
13
8
55
982
11 9
04
35
3775
50
-120
Frequency (kHz)
Figure 5.3.8-12 – VDSL2 EU-128 profiles 12a, 12b and 17a upstream all digital mode
operation PSD mask
151
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.8-11 – VDSL2 EU-128 profile 30a upstream all digital mode operation PSD
mask limits
Frequency
(kHz)
PSD level (dBm/Hz)
for profile 30a
across 100 ohms
RBW
0.200
−46.5
100 Hz
1.5
−46.5
100 Hz
3
−34.5
100 Hz
138
−34.5
10 kHz
552
-40.6
10 kHz
989
−100
10 kHz
1104
−100
10 kHz
3575
−100
10 kHz
3750
−80
10 kHz
3750
−49.5
10 kHz
5200
−49.5
10 kHz
5200
−80
10 kHz
5375
−100
10 kHz
8375
−100
10 kHz
8500
−80
10 kHz
8500
−50.5
10 kHz
12000
−50.5
10 kHz
12000
−80
10 kHz
12175
−100
10 kHz
21250
−100
10 kHz
23000
−80
10 kHz
23000
−56.5
10 kHz
30000
−56.5
10 kHz
30000
−80
10 kHz
30175
−110
10 kHz
152
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
-20
PSD MASK (dBm/Hz)
-30
-40
-50
-60
-70
-80
-90
-100
-110
3 00
3 01 00
75
2 12
2 30 50
00
1 20
1 21 00
75
8 37
8 50 5
0
5 20
5 37 0
5
3 57
3 75 5
0
1 38
5 52
98
1 109
4
3
0 .2
1 .5
-120
Frequency (kHz)
Figure 5.3.8-13 – VDSL2 EU-128 profile 30a upstream all digital mode operation PSD
mask
153
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.3.8.2
The transverse balance for SMC6, VDSL and VDSL2 terminal equipment shall
equal or exceed the values in figure 5.3.2-5 over the entire range of frequencies
as defined in table 5.3.8-12. In addition, SMC6, VDSL and VDSL2 over POTS
modes shall equal or exceed the minimum transverse balance requirements for
analog voice band equipment in 5.1.6.
The metallic impedance used for the transverse balance measurements for
SMC6, VDSL and VDSL2 shall be 100 ohms. The metallic test voltage is 0.316V.
For 0.2 to 12 kHz the longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 500 ohms, and above
12 kHz the longitudinal termination (RL) shall be 90 ohms.
Transverse balance testing is described in TIA TSB-31-C. Illustrative test circuits
for transverse balance conformance testing with and without loop simulator
circuits are shown in figures 4.10 and 4.11. Testing is done with the TE
transmitter turned off.
Table 5.3.8-12 – Frequency ranges of transverse balance requirements for SMC6,
VDSL and VDSL2 equipment
Interface
Frequency range
(kHz)
Longitudinal
termination
(RL) (ohms)
Metallic
termination
(RM) (ohms)
SMC6
VDSL over POTS
13.6 to 12,000
13.6 to 12,000
90
90
100
100
VDSL2 over POTS profiles 8a, 8b, 8c, and 8d
13.6 to 8,500
90
100
VDSL2 over POTS profiles 12a and 12b
13.6 to 12,000
90
100
VDSL2 over POTS profiles 17a
13.6 to 21,000
90
100
VDSL2 over POTS profiles 30a
13.6 to 30,000
90
100
VDSL2 all digital mode profiles 8a, 8b, 8c, and 8d
0.2 to 8,500
90 or 500
100
VDSL2 all digital mode profiles 12a and 12b
0.2 to 12,000
90 or 500
100
VDSL2 all digital mode profiles 17a
0.2 to 21,000
90 or 500
100
VDSL2 all digital mode profiles 30a
0.2 to 30,000
90 or 500
100
154
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5.3.8.3
SMC6, VDSL and VDSL2 longitudinal output voltage limitations:
For VDSL and VDSL2 over POTS modes, approved terminal equipment shall
meet the voice band longitudinal voltage limitations of 4.5.4.1 as well as the
limitations of 4.5.5.2.1 for a center frequency of 8 kHz, which covers the frequency
span from 4 to 12 kHz. In addition, using the longitudinal output voltage
measurement circuit in figure 5.3.2-6, VDSL and VDSL2 equipment shall limit
longitudinal output voltage above 12 kHz to the values shown in table 5.3.8-13.
Using the illustrative longitudinal output voltage measurement circuit in figure
5.3.2-6, VDSL2 equipment operating in all digital mode shall limit longitudinal
output voltage above 0.1 kHz to the values shown in table 5.3.8-13.
Table 5.3.8-13 – Maximum longitudinal output voltage for VDSL2 terminal equipment
Maximum longitudinal output voltage
Frequency
(dBVrms) in all 4 kHz bands averaged over
Band
a minimum period of 1 second (see note 3)
(kHz)
Profiles
8a, 8b,
8c, and
8d
(see notes 1 and 2)
Profiles
Profile
Profile
12a and
12b
17a
30a
fa (note 1) to fb (note 2)
-50
-50
-50
-50
fb (note 2) to 3,750
-80
-80
-80
-80
3,750 to 5,200
-50
-50
-50
-50
5,200 to 8,500
-80
-80
-80
-80
8,500 to 12,000
-80
-50
-50
-50
-80
-80
-80
12,000 to 21,000
21,000 to 23,000
-80
23,000 to 30,000
-50
NOTES
1.) Frequency fa is 0.1 kHz for all digital modes and 12 kHz for operating modes designed to
work on the same loop as a voice band service such as POTS.
2.) Frequency fb is the frequency at which the PSD mask is approximately 30 dB below the
peak mask value. The fb values for various VDSL2 upstream PSD masks are given in Table
5.3.8-14.
155
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
3.) If a 3 kHz measurement bandwidth is used rather than the 4 kHz bandwidth on which the
requirements are based, a 1.3 dB correction factor for the smaller measurement bandwidth
is applied to the maximum longitudinal output voltage limits thus decreasing -50 dBV limits
to -51.3 dBV and -80 dBV limits to -81.3 dBV respectively.
156
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 5.3.8-14 – Values of fb for various VDSL2 upstream PSD masks
5.3.8.4
5.3.9
5.3.9.1
All-digital
mode
designator
fb (kHz)
EU-32
EU-36
EU-40
EU-44
EU-48
EU-52
EU-56
EU-60
EU-64
EU-128
ADLU -32
ADLU -36
ADLU -40
ADLU -44
ADLU -48
ADLU -52
ADLU -56
ADLU -60
ADLU -64
EU-128
184
207
230
253
276
299
322
345
368
741
Limitations on equipment intended for operation on loop-start telephone facilities.
Approved terminal equipment that operate over POTS shall conform to the
requirements in 5.1.7.2.
SMC 2, SMC 3, SMC 7, SMC 8, and other DSL:
NOTE – SMC = spectrum management class
SMC 2, SMC 3, SMC 7, SMC 8, and other DSL signal power limitations: The
PSD for other DSL terminal equipment shall not exceed the upstream PSD mask
defined below for that corresponds to the mode of operation for which the modem
is configured:
SMC 2:
SMC 3:
SMC 7:
SMC 8:
5.3.9.2
Operating
with POTS
designator
T1.417-2003
T1.417-2003
T1.417-2003
T1.417-2003
subclauses 5.3.2.1 and 6.1
subclauses 5.3.3.1 and 6.1
subclauses 5.3.7.1 and 6.1
subclauses 5.3.8.1 and 6.1
SMC 2, SMC 3, SMC 7, SMC 8, and other DSL transverse balance limitations:
Approved DSL terminal equipment shall equal or exceed the minimum transverse
balance requirements in figure 5.3.2-5 for each of the supported PSD masks
defined in 5.3.9.1 during all operating states and under all reasonable conditions
of the application of earth ground to the equipment under test.
In addition, transverse balance requirements shall be met for all values of loop
157
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
current, span power voltage, or sealing current that the interface under test is
capable of drawing.
Approved DSL terminal equipment shall equal or exceed the minimum transverse
balance requirements over the entire range of applicable operating frequencies at
all 2-wire network interfaces. For the purposes of this requirement, the applicable
operating range is defined as the entire range of frequencies between the highest
and lowest frequencies having PSD values within 20 dB of the peak PSD. Thus,
the applicable frequency range for transverse balance testing varies depending
upon the supported PSD masks.
For DSL equipment operating with different upstream and downstream frequency
spectrums, the upper and lower frequencies for transverse balance testing shall
consider the downstream frequency spectrum as well as the upstream frequency
spectrum since both signals will be present at the network interface.
DSL terminal equipment designed to operate on the same loop as voice service
shall equal or exceed the minimum transverse balance requirements for analog
voice band equipment in 4.5.2.
The longitudinal termination shall be 500 Ω for frequencies between 200 Hz and
12 kHz; 90 ohms for frequencies above 12 kHz. The metallic source impedance
shall be as specified in ANSI T1.417- 2003 for each spectrum management class
supported by equipment.
Transverse balance testing is described in TIA/EIA-TSB31-C and illustrative test
circuits for transverse balance conformance testing with and without loop
simulator circuits are shown in figures 4.7 and 4.8. Transverse balance testing is
done with the TE transmitter turned off.
5.3.9.3
SMC 2, SMC 3, SMC 7, SMC 8, and other DSL longitudinal output voltage
limitations: For each of the supported PSD masks defined in 5.3.9.1 above,
approved DSL terminal equipment shall meet the corresponding TU-R longitudinal
output voltage limits in:
SMC 2:
SMC 3:
SMC 7:
SMC 8:
T1.417-2003
T1.417-2003
T1.417-2003
T1.417-2003
subclauses 5.3.2.3
subclauses 5.3.3.3
subclauses 5.3.7.3
subclauses 5.3.8.3
158
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
6 SPECIAL CASES
6.1
COMPONENT APPROVAL
Component approval is a process intended for a product that has been designed to be used
in combination with other approved components or host terminal equipment.
The purpose of the component approval process is to permit a product to receive approval
as a component without having to be tested with every possible combination of other
approved components and host terminal equipment.
An example of component approval is a multi-circuit PSTN interface card used with a
voicemail card and a generic personal computer host to create a custom voicemail system.
In this case, the PSTN interface card and the voicemail card may be approved as
components, but the personal computer and the assembled voicemail system need not be
approved.
6.1.1
6.1.1.1
Approved components:
Complete compliance as a stand alone device means that the product meets all
criteria in this Standard and 47CFR Part 68 requirements as a stand alone device
and can demonstrate compliance without being tested in combination with an
approved component or host terminal equipment.
For example, approved single-line telephones, answering machines, PBXs, or
approved protective circuitry provide complete compliance with this Standard and
Part 68 as stand alone devices and do not need to be tested for compliance in
combination with any other approved component or host equipment.
If a product can achieve complete compliance with this Standard and Part 68 as a
stand alone device, then it is not eligible for component approval.
6.1.1.2
Approved components, general: These are products that are designed to be used
in combination with other approved components, host terminal equipment, or both
other approved components and host terminal equipment. There are two
categories of approved components:

Components with a network interface (equipment code CN), and,

Components without a network interface (equipment code CE).
In addition, approved components can be classified as host-independent, hostspecific, and both host-independent and host-specific.
6.1.1.3
Approved components with a network interface: As shown in figure 6.1.1 with
equipment code CN, these are components with telephone leads that can be
connected directly to wireline carrier networks. Approved components with a
159
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
network interface are different than ordinary terminal equipment in that they are
not designed to function on a stand alone basis, like a telephone, but are
designed to always be used in combination with:

Approved components without a network interface, as shown with equipment
code CE in (a) of figure 6.1.1,

Host terminal equipment as shown in (d) of figure 6.1.1, or,

Both approved components without a network interface (equipment code CE)
and host terminal equipment as shown in (b) of figure 6.1.1.
CE CN
NI
(a)
CE
CN
NI
Host terminal
equipment
(b)
CE
NI
Approved host
equipment
(c)
CN
NI
Host terminal
equipment
(d)
Figure 6.1.1 – Valid combinations of approved components
160
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
6.1.1.4
6.1.1.5
6.1.1.6
Approved components without a network interface, shown in figure 6.1.1 with
equipment code CE, are components that have not been designed to connect
directly to wireline carrier networks and may only be used in combination with:

Approved components with a network interface, as shown with equipment
code CN in figure 6.1.1(a),

Approved host terminal equipment as shown in figure 6.1.1(c), or,

Both approved components with a network interface (equipment code CN) and
host terminal equipment as shown in figure 6.1.1(b).
Approved host-independent components shall provide complete compliance with
this Standard and Part 68 when tested in combination with a generic model or
family of host equipment (personal computers from any manufacturer, for
example) identified by the Responsible Party in the test report and customer
instructions. Examples of possible devices include personal computer-mounted:

Network interface cards

Voicemail cards

Switch matrix cards
Approved host-specific components shall provide complete compliance with this
Standard and Part 68 when tested in combination with a specific model or family
of host equipment as defined by the manufacturer (for example, company ABC,
models X, Y, and Z) and identified by the Responsible Party in the test report and
customer instructions.
All such approved host-specific components and host equipment are made by, or
under license of, a single Responsible Party. Examples of possible devices
include:
6.1.1.7

PBX telephone with proprietary interfaces

Voicemail system with proprietary interfaces

PBX network interface cards

VoIP phone for connection behind network gateways
Approved components that are both host-independent and host-specific shall
provide complete compliance with this Standard and Part 68 when tested in
combination with (1) a generic model or family of host equipment identified by the
Responsible Party in the test report and customer instructions, and (2) a specific
model or family of host equipment identified by the Responsible Party in the test
report and customer instructions, and made by, or under license of, a single
Responsible Party.
161
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
6.1.2
Demonstration of compliance:
Approved components (with or without a network interface) shall meet all applicable
technical criteria in this Standard and Part 68 when tested in combination with
approved components or host terminal equipment identified by the Responsible
Party in the test report and customer instructions.
For example, if the approved component has a loop start interface or is intended to
be used with an approved component or host terminal equipment with a loop start
interface, then it must meet all applicable technical criteria in this Standard and Part
68 pertaining to terminal equipment with a loop start interface when tested in
combination with approved components or host terminal equipment identified by the
Responsible Party in the test report and customer instructions.
Host-independent components shall demonstrate compliance with the applicable
technical criteria in this Standard and Part 68 by testing with at least three types of
approved host components or host terminal equipment identified by the Responsible
Party in the test report and customer instructions.
Host-specific components shall demonstrate compliance with the applicable
technical criteria in this Standard and Part 68 by testing with approved host-specific
components or host terminal equipment identified by the Responsible Party in the
test report and customer instructions.
6.1.3
General requirements:
All technical criteria in this Standard and Part 68 are applicable to approved
components.
An approved component shall, on its own, demonstrate compliance with the
applicable requirements of this Standard and Part 68. The approved component
cannot rely on another device or product (hardware or software) not included with the
original product to comply with the applicable requirements of this Standard and Part
68. If a device does rely on another device or product (hardware or software) to
comply with the applicable requirements of this Standard or Part 68, then it is not
eligible for component approval.
Approved components with a network interface shall meet all applicable
requirements in this Standard for the particular type of network interface and features
and functions provided by the component when connected to the host equipment
and/or approved component without a network interface identified by the
Responsible Party in the test report and customer instructions.
Approved components without a network interface shall meet all applicable
requirements in this Standard for the features and functions provided by the
component and the particular type of network interface provided by the host
equipment and/or approved component with a network interface identified by the
Responsible Party in the test report and customer instructions.
6.1.3.1
Requirements for approved components with a network interface: Below are
tables which identify the technical criteria in this standard that are applicable to
162
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
components with specific types of network interfaces.
Table 6.1.1 specifies the technical criteria applicable to a CN type component with
a digital interface (i.e., subrate, PSDS, ISDN PRA, or DS1). The component is
assumed to contain NCTE or NT1 functions (that is, it is able to connect directly to
wireline carrier networks).
Table 6.1.2 specifies additional technical criteria that are applicable if the
component has the listed feature or function.
Table 6.1.3 specifies the technical criteria applicable to a CN type component with
certain analog voice band interfaces (i.e., loop-start, ground-start, loop reverse
battery incoming, 2-wire E&M, 4-wire E&M, off premises station, and private line).
The technical criteria in Table 6.1.2 are also applicable if the component has the
listed feature or function.
Any approved component with a loop start or ground start interface, or both, shall
control all parameters which determine the Ringer Equivalence Number (REN).
The ringer load presented to the PSTN by an approved component with a loop
start or ground start interface shall be completely defined by that component. If
an approved component with a loop start or ground start interface relies on
another component or host terminal equipment (hardware or software) not
supplied by the Responsible Party with the approved component, then it is not
eligible for component approval. The REN value of an approved component with
a loop start or ground start interface, or both, shall not change or vary depending
on the equipment connected to the approved component.
Table 6.1.1 – Applicable technical criteria for CN component with digital interface and
NCTE or NT1 functions.
TIA-968-B
clause
Type of digital network interface
Applicable technical criteria
Subrate &
PSDS
PSDS
ISDN
1.544
PSDS I
II
III
PRA
Mbps
number
4.1.1
Mechanical shock
X
X
X
X
X
4.1.2, 4.1.3
Type A and Type B surges
X
X
X
X
X
4.1.4
Power line surge
X
X
X
X
X
4.2
Leakage current limitations
X
X
X
X
X
4.3.1
Hazardous voltage - General
X
X
X
X
X
4.3.2
Physical separation of leads
X
X
X
X
X
4.3.3
Non-hazardous voltage source
X
X
X
X
X
4.3.4
Intentional protective paths to ground
X
X
X
X
X
4.4.2.3, 4.4.3.2
Billing protection
X
X
X
4.7
Allowable net amplification between ports
X
X
X
X
X
5.1.7
Loop-start interface
5.2.2
Subrate & PSDS I
5.2.3
PSDS II & III
5.2.4
ISDN PRA & 1.544
X
X
X
X
X
163
X
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Table 6.1.2 – TIA-968-B and Part 68 technical criteria applicable to various features
and functions
Component function
TIA-968-B clause number
or 47CFR Part 68 section
Connector (plug and/or jack)
4.6 (see also TIA-1096-A)
On premises station with loop-start Interface
5.1.5.1 and 5.1.5.4
Handset
68.316 and 68.317
Automatic redialing capability
68.318(b)
Automatic telephone dialing capability
68.318(c)
Facsimile machine sender identification
68.318(d)
Equal access to common carriers
68.318(e)
Table 6.1.3 – Applicable technical criteria for CN component with analog voice band
interface
TIA-968-B
Type of analog voice band interface
Applicable technical criteria
LS
GS
RB
2E&M
4E&M
OPS
PL
4.1.1
Mechanical shock
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4.1.2, 4.1.3
Type A and Type B surges
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4.1.4
Power line surge
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4.2
Leakage current limitations
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4.3.1
Hazardous voltage limitations - general
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4.3.2
Physical separation of leads
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4.3.3
Non-hazardous voltage source
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4.3.4
Intentional paths to ground
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4.4
Billing protection
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5.1.1
Voice band signal power limits - general
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5.1.2
Limitations on signals not intended for
network control signaling
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5.1.3
Limitations on signals intended for network
control signaling
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5.1.4
Limitations at the interface from non
approved external signal sources
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5.1.5, 4.7
Through transmission limitations
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5.1.6
Analog voice band transverse balance
limits
X
X
X
X
X
5.1.7
Loop-start interface requirements
X
5.1.8
Ground-start interface requirements
5.1.9
Loop reverse battery - incoming
5.1.10
E&M
5.1.11
Off premises station
5.1.12
Private line
clause
number
X
X
X
X
X
X
164
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
6.1.3.2
Requirements for approved component without a network interface: These
components shall comply with the requirements given below both before and after
being subjected to the mechanical shock simulation in subclause 4.1.1 and the
power line surge in subclause 4.1.4.
Approved components without a network interface shall comply with the leakage
current limitations in clause 4.2 and the billing protection requirements in clause
4.4.
The technical criteria in table 6.1.2 are also applicable if the component has the
listed feature or function.
If the component controls answer supervision on DID calls, then the operating
requirements for DID in subclauses 5.1.9.4 or 5.2.4.9 are applicable.
Non-live voice signals generated toward the PSTN by an approved component
without a network interface shall exit the approved component compliant with the
analog voice band signal power requirements of subclauses 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 5.1.3,
5.1.4, and 5.1.5.
If an approved component without a network interface contains an analog-todigital converter or generates a data bit stream to host terminal equipment with a
network interface, or an approved component with a digital network interface, and
the bit stream is intended for eventual conversion into voice band analog signals
in the PSTN, the encoded analog content of the digital signal shall be limited as
specified in clause 4.5.
Any analog-analog through-path shall not contain any net amplification.
The connector specifications in clause 4.6 are applicable to plugs or jacks that
can be connected directly to premises wiring.
Approved components without a network interface shall not cause approved
components or approved host terminal equipment with a network interface
(identified by the Responsible Party in the test report and customer instructions) to
fail to meet any applicable technical criteria of this Standard or Part 68 when
connected to such devices.
6.1.4
Environmental simulation, leakage current, and hazardous voltage:
Approved components with a network interface shall comply with the environmental
simulation requirements in clause 4.1, leakage current limitations in clause 4.2, and
hazardous voltage limitations in clause 4.3.
Approved components with a network interface shall provide the required
isolation/protection totally within the device. For example, when testing for leakage
current compliance of a particular PC network interface card, all connections to the
host equipment or other devices, not covered by the test point definitions, shall be
165
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
classified as connection point (c) (specifically 1000 volts AC from tip and ring (T&R)
to edge connector and MVIP connector pins). This ensures sufficient dielectric
isolation at the component.
Approved components without a network interface shall comply with the mechanical
shock simulation in subclause 4.1.1, leakage current limitations in clause 4.2, and if
applicable, the power line surge simulation in subclause 4.1.4.
6.1.5
Billing protection and encoded analog content:
Approved components shall meet the applicable billing protection requirements in
clause 4.4 and, if the component controls answer supervision on DID calls, the
operating requirements for DID in subclauses 5.1.9.4 or 5.2.4.9.
If the approved component contains an analog-to-digital converter or generates a
data bit stream to the network interface, to host terminal equipment with a digital
network interface, or to an approved component with a digital network interface, and
the bit stream is intended for eventual conversion into voice band analog signals in
the PSTN, the encoded analog content of the digital signal shall be limited as
specified in clause 4.5.
6.1.6
Analog voice band signal power limitations:
Approved components that generate non-live voice analog voice band signals to an
analog network interface, host terminal equipment with an analog network interface,
or an approved components with an analog network interface, the analog signals
shall meet the applicable requirements in subclauses 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 5.1.3, and 5.1.4.
6.1.7
Through transmission paths:
If an approved component cannot demonstrate compliance with the through
transmission requirements of clause 4.7 because the entire through transmission
path is not contained within the approved component, the Responsible Party (RP)
shall (1) provide a written attestation and test results demonstrating that all analog
through-transmission paths within the approved component have zero net
amplification, and (2) test results demonstrating that the overall through transmission
path provided by the approved component in combination with host terminal
equipment and other approved components, identified by the RP in the test report
and customer instructions, meets the requirements of clause 4.7.
166
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
6.2
SERIES DEVICES
6.2.1
Requirements:
Devices designed to be connected in series with other terminal equipment shall be
tested for transverse balance in all modes that can occur in normal use. Criteria
shall be satisfied for all ports when all of the ports not under test are terminated in
networks that simulate conditions that can occur in normal use. For analog voice
band equipment, an off-hook telephone may be simulated as shown in figure 4.12.
An on-hook telephone may be simulated as shown in figure 4.16. An ADSL modem
may be simulated as shown in figure 4.17.
for analog voice band
for subrate digital
for 1.544 Mbps
R1
R2 = R3
R4
300 k ohms,
100 k ohms,
100 k ohms,
300 ohms
67.5 ohms
50 ohms
350 ohms
56.3 ohms
65 ohms
NOTE – R1 is used to adjust termination balance. Adjust the termination balance
to at least 60 dB between 200 and 1000 Hz, at least 40 dB between 1000 and
4000 Hz, and at least 35 dB at 1.544 MHz.
Figure 4.12 – Off-hook termination of multiport equipment for ports not under test
167
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Tip
100k
100k
10M
100k
Ring
NOTE – R1 is used to adjust termination balance. Adjust the termination balance to
at least 60 dB between 200 and 1000 Hz, and at least 40 dB between 1000 and
4000 Hz.
Figure 4.16 – On-hook termination for ports not under test.
0.1uF
100
0.47mH
0.1uF
Tolerances: Capacitors 2.5%
Resistor 1%
Inductor 5%
Figure 4.17 – ADSL modem termination simulator.
168
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Annex A (normative) – Grandfathered Terminal Equipment
A.1 Introduction:
The grandfather provisions in this Annex were originally contained in Part 68 of the FCC
Rules. These grandfather provisions provide an alternative whereby certain non-approved
TE can be directly connected to U.S. wireline carrier networks during a limited transition
period. Clauses A.2 through A.11 provide the U.S. grandfather conditions for various types
of TE.
In each of the grandfather clauses below, two different dates are given. The date in item (a)
of each clause is the grandfather eligibility date. The approval-only date is given in item (b)
of each clause. Non-approved TE is grandfathered if it was directly connected to a wireline
carrier network as of the grandfather eligibility date. Any TE identical to a grandfathered
device is also eligible for grandfathering if it was directly connected prior to the approval-only
date. TE cannot be grandfathered after the approval-only date.
Non-approved grandfathered TE may remain connected for life, without approval, unless
subsequently modified. In this Annex, the phrase "may remain connected for life" means
that grandfathered TE may remain connected, or be moved or reconnected at the same or
different premises, for the life of the equipment. In this Annex, the phrase "unless
subsequently modified" is not intended to limit routine repairs that restore TE to the same
functional operation and specifications it had prior to the failure that resulted in the repair
operation. Instead, the phrase "unless subsequently modified" is intended to cause
grandfathered status to be lost if:

Components are replaced during a repair operation with components that are not
comparable to the original ones;

Changes are made to the equipment that affect the Part 68 and TIA-968-B-related
characteristics of that equipment at the network interface or compliance with
technical criteria in this Standard or 47CFR Part 68 rules;

Modifications significantly change the function(s) of the original equipment.
In this Annex, the term "directly connected" refers to any direct electrical connection, either
by a telephone company or by a customer, made in accordance with the telephone
companies' tariffs and without a protective connecting arrangement. Thus TE that is directly
connected, within the meaning of this Annex, includes all TE supplied by telephone
companies (including "connecting arrangements and data access arrangements") as well as
the following types of customer-provided equipment:

Attested operators' headsets and conferencing devices

Conformed telephone answering devices

Equipment connected by many "special" entities, e.g., gas, oil, electric, transportation
companies, selected industrial firms, the Department of Defense, the National
Aeronautics and Space Administration, and customers in "hazardous or inaccessible
locations."
169
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
In this Annex, the term "of a type" generally means the same model of equipment made by
the same manufacturer and is intended to mean equipment of the same mechanical and
electrical design.
Non-approved, non-grandfathered equipment may only be directly connected to the network
through the use of approved or grandfathered protective circuitry.
A.2 Grandfathered terminal equipment (other than PBX and key telephone systems)
and protective circuitry:
a) All terminal equipment (other than PBX and key telephone systems) and
protective circuitry of a type directly connected to the public switched
telephone network and services identified in 1.1(b) as of October 17, 1977,
may remain connected for life, without approval, unless subsequently
modified.
b) New installations of terminal equipments (other than PBX and key telephone
systems) and protective circuitry (if any) may be performed up to July 1, 1979,
without approval of any terminal equipment involved, provided that these
terminal equipments are of a type directly connected to of a type directly
connected to the public switched telephone network and services identified in
1.1(b) as of October 17, 1977. These terminal equipments may remain
connected for life, without approval, unless subsequently modified.
A.3 Grandfathered systems (including, but not limited to, PBX and key telephone
systems):
a) Entire systems, including their equipment, premises wiring, and protective
apparatus (if any) directly connected to the public switched telephone network
and services identified in 1.1(b) on June 1, 1978, may remain connected for
life without approval, unless subsequently modified, except for modifications
allowed under A.3(c).
b) New installations of equipments may be performed (including additions to
existing systems) up to January 1, 1980, without approval of any equipments
involved, provided that these equipments are of a type directly connected to
the public switched telephone network or services identified in 1.1(b) as of
June 1, 1978. These equipments may remain connected for life without
approval, unless subsequently modified, except for modifications allowed
under A.3(c).
c) Modifications to systems and installations involving unapproved equipment:
1) Use of other than fully-protected premises wiring is a modification under
clause 1.1. As an exception to the general requirement that no modification
is permitted to unapproved equipment whose use is permitted under clause
1.1, certain modifications are authorized herein.
2) Other than fully-protected premises wiring may be used if it is qualified in
accordance with the procedures and requirements of § 68.215. Since there
is no ‘‘responsible party’’ of unapproved equipment, the training and authority
required by § 68.215(c) will have to be received from the equipment’s
170
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
manufacturer.
3) Existing separate, identifiable and discrete protective apparatus may be
removed, or replaced with apparatus of lesser protective function, provided
that any premises wiring to which the public switched telephone network or
service identified in 1.1 is there-by exposed conforms to A.3(c)(2) above.
Minor modifications to existing unapproved equipments are authorized to
facilitate installation or premises wiring, so long as they are performed under
the responsible supervision and control of a person who complies with §
68.215(c). Since there is no ‘‘responsible party’’ of unapproved equipment,
the training and authority required by § 68.215(c) will have to be received
from the manufacturer of the equipment so modified.
A.4 Grandfathered private branch exchange (or similar) systems for connection to
private line type services (tie trunk type services, off-premises station lines,
automatic identified outward dialing, and message registration):
a) PBX (or similar) systems, including their equipments, premises wiring, and protective
apparatus (if any) directly connected to a private line type service on April 30, 1980
may remain connected for life without approval unless subsequently modified,
except for modifications allowed under A.4(c).
b) New installations of equipments may be performed (including additions to existing
systems) up to May 1, 1983 without approval of any equipments involved, provided
that these equipments are of a type directly connected to a private line type service
as of April 30, 1980. These equipments may remain connected for life without
approval, unless subsequently modified, except for modifications allowed under
A.4(c).
c) PBX (or similar) systems connected with automatic identified outward dialing or
message registered private line services of a type that complies with clauses A.4(a)
and A.4(b) of this section may remain connected for life, without approval, unless
subsequently modified.
d) Modifications to systems and installations involving unapproved equipment:
1) Use of other than fully-protected premises wiring is a modification under clause
1.1. As an exception to the general requirement that no modification is permitted
to unapproved equipment whose use is permitted under clause 1.1, certain
modifications are authorized herein.
2) Other than fully-protected premises wiring may be used if it is qualified in
accordance with the procedures and requirements of § 68.215. Since there is no
‘‘responsible party’’ of unapproved equipment, the training and authority required
by § 68.215(c) will have to be received from the equipment’s manufacturer.
3) Existing separate, identifiable and discrete protective apparatus may be removed,
or replaced with apparatus of lesser protective function, provided that any
premises wiring to which the private line type service is thereby exposed
conforms to A.4(c)(2) above. Minor modifications to existing unapproved
equipments are authorized to facilitate installation or premises wiring, so long as
they are performed under the responsible supervision and control of a person
who complies with § 68.215(c). Since there is no ‘‘responsible party’ of
unapproved equipment, the training and authority required by § 68.215(c) will
171
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
have to be received from the manufacturer of the equipment so modified.
A.5 Grandfathered terminal equipment for connection to local area data channels:
a) All terminal equipment of a type directly connected to Local Area Data
Channels or directly connected under special assembly tariff provisions to
telephone company-supplied, non-loaded, metallic, greater-than-voice band
circuits for the purpose of providing limited distance data transmission as of
February 10, 1986, may remain connected for life, without approval, unless
subsequently modified.
b) New installations of terminal equipment may be performed up to August 10,
1987 without approval of any terminal equipment involved, provided that these
terminal equipments are of a type directly connected to Local Area Data
Channels or directly connected under special assembly tariff provisions to
telephone company-supplied, non-loaded, metallic, greater-than-voice band
circuits for the purpose of providing limited distance data transmission as of
February 10, 1986. These terminal equipments may remain connected for
life, without approval, unless subsequently modified.
A.6 Grandfathered terminal equipment for connection to subrate and 1.544 Mbps
digital services:
a) Terminal equipment including premises wiring and protective apparatus (if
any) directly connected to subrate or to 1.544 Mbps digital services on
January 2, 1986, may remain connected for life, without approval, unless
subsequently modified.
b) New installations of terminal equipments, including premises wiring and
protective apparatus (if any) may be installed including additions to existing
systems) up to June 30, 1987, without approval of any terminal equipment
involved, provided that these terminal equipments are of a type directly
connected to subrate or 1.544 Mbps digital services as of January 2, 1986.
These terminal equipments may remain connected for life, without approval,
unless subsequently modified.
A.7 Grandfathered test equipment:
a) Test equipment directly connected to the telephone network on February 10,
1986, is considered to be grandfathered and may remain connected for life,
without approval, unless subsequently modified.
b) New installations of test equipment may be performed up to August 10, 1987
without approval, provided that the test equipment is of a type directly
connected to the public switched network or services identified in 1.1(a), (b),
(c), (d), (e), and (f). This test equipment may remain connected for life,
without approval, unless subsequently modified.
A.8 Grandfathered terminal equipment or systems for connection to voice band
private line channels for 2-point and multipoint private line services that utilize loop
start, ringdown, or in-band signaling; or voice band metallic channels:
a) Terminal equipment or systems, including premises wiring and protective
apparatus (if any), directly connected to voice band private lines for 2-point or
172
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
multipoint service on February 10, 1986, may remain connected for life without
approval unless subsequently modified, except for modifications allowed
under A.8(c).
b) New installations of equipments may be installed (including additions to
existing systems) up to August 10, 1987 without approval of any equipments
involved, provided that these equipments are of a type directly connected to
voice band private lines for 2-point or multipoint services. These equipments
may remain connected for life, without approval, unless subsequently
modified, except for modifications allowed under A.8(c).
c) Modification to systems and installations involving unapproved equipment:
1) Use of other than fully-protected premises wiring is a modification under clause
1.1. As an exception to the general requirements that no modification is
permitted to unapproved equipment whose use is permitted under clause 1.1,
certain modifications are authorized herein.
2) Other than fully-protected premises wiring may be used if it is qualified in
accordance with procedures and requirements of § 68.215. Since there is no
‘‘responsible party’’ of unapproved equipment, the training and authority required
by § 68.215(c) will have to be received from the equipment’s manufacturer.
3) Existing separate, identifiable, and discrete protective apparatus may be
removed or replaced with apparatus of lesser protective function, provided that
any premises wiring to which the private line service is thereby exposed
conforms to A.8(c)(2) of this section. Minor modifications to existing unapproved
equipments are authorized to facilitate installation of premises wiring, so long as
they are performed under the responsible supervision and control of a person
who complies with § 68.215(c). Since there is no ‘‘responsible party’’ of
unapproved equipment, the training and authority required by §68.215(c) will
have to be received from the manufacturer of the equipment so modified.
A.9 Terminal equipment, including its premises wiring directly connected to PSDS
(Type I, II or III):
a) Terminal equipment, including its premises wiring directly connected to PSDS (Type
I, II or III) on or before November 13, 1996, may remain connected for life without
approval, unless subsequently modified.
b) New installation of terminal equipment, including its premises wiring, may occur until
May 13, 1998, without approval of any terminal equipment involved, provided that the
terminal equipment is of a type directly connected to PSDS (Type I, II or III) as of
November 13, 1996. This terminal equipment may remain connected for life, without
approval, unless subsequently modified.
A.10 Terminal equipment, including premises wiring directly connected to ISDN BRI
or PRI:
a) Terminal equipment, including premises wiring directly connected to ISDN BRI or
PRI on November 13, 1996, may remain connected for life without approval, unless
subsequently modified.
b) New installation of terminal equipment, including premises wiring, may occur until
May 13, 1998, without approval of any terminal equipment involved, provided that the
173
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
terminal equipment is of a type directly connected to ISDN BRI or PRI as of
November 13, 1996. This terminal equipment may remain connected for life, without
approval, unless subsequently modified.
174
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
A.11 Grandfathered central office implemented payphone equipment:
a) Terminal equipment, including its premises wiring, that is directly connected to a
central-office-implemented telephone line on or before October 8, 1997, may remain
connected for life, without approval, unless subsequently modified.
b) New installation of terminal equipment, including its premises wiring, may occur until
April 8, 1999, without approval of any central-office-implemented telephone line
equipment involved, provided that the terminal equipment is of a type directly
connected to a central-office-implemented telephone line as of October 8,1997. This
terminal equipment may remain connected for life, without approval, unless
subsequently modified.
175
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Annex B (informative) – Cross references to TIA-968-A
This annex provides a cross-referenced index between this document and its previous
version TIA-968-A and its five addendums.
Table B.1 – Cross-reference to TIA-968-A and its addendums
Description
Scope
Normative References
Definitions
Environmental Simulation
Mechanical shock
Telephone line surge – Type A
Metallic
Longitudinal
Telephone line surge – Type B
Metallic
Longitudinal
Power line surge
Leakage Current Limitations
Hazardous Voltage Limitations
General requirements
Type I E&M leads
The maximum AC potential between E&M leads and
ground reference
Type II E&M leads
Hazardous voltages for OPS interfaces
Ringing signals applied by the PBX to OPS interface
Direct inward dialing (DID)
For local area data channel interfaces
Hazardous voltage limits for ringdown voice band private
line and voice band metallic channel interface
Connection of non-approved equipment to approved
terminal equipment or approved protective circuitry
Non-hazardous voltage source
TIA-968-A, A-1, A2, A-3, A-4, A-5
1.1
1.2
1.3
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.2.1
4.2.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.3.1
4.2.3.2
4.2.4
4.3
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.1.1
1
2
3.1
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.2.1
4.1.2.2
4.1.3
4.1.3.1
4.1.3.2
4.1.4
4.2
4.3
4.3.1
5.1.10.1
4.4.1.2
5.1.10.2
4.4.1.3
4.4.1.4.1
4.4.1.4.2
4.4.1.5
4.4.1.6
5.1.10.3
5.1.11.2
5.1.11.3
5.1.9.3
4.4.1.7
5.1.12.3
4.4.2
4.3.2
4.4.3
4.3.3
5.1.11.4,
5.1.12.4, 5.2.1.3
4.3.4
4.3.4.1
Ringing sources (OPS, Private Line & LADC)
4.4.4
Intentional paths to ground
Connections with operational paths to ground
4.4.5
4.4.5.1
176
TIA-968-B
5.2.1.2
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Description
Connections with protection paths to ground
Signal Power Limitations
Analog voice band signal power limits – General
Limitations on signals not intended for network control
signaling
Limitations on signals intended for network control signaling
Limitations at the interface from non-approved external
signal sources
Through transmission limitations
DC conditions
Data terminal equipment jack limitations
Data terminal equipment
Allowable net amplification between ports
Tie trunk interfaces limitation on idle circuit stability
parameters
DC conditions to off-premises station (OPS) lines
Signal power in the 3995–4005 Hz frequency band
Longitudinal voltage at frequencies below 4 kHz
Voltage in the 4 kHz to 30 MHz frequency range
Metallic voltage 4 KHz to 270 kHz
Metallic voltage 270 kHz to 30 MHz
Longitudinal voltage 4 KHz to 270 kHz
Longitudinal voltage 270 kHz to 6 MHz
LADC interface
Requirements in subclauses 4.5.4, 4.5.5 and 4.5.6
Limitations on terminal equipment connecting to subrate
digital services
DS1 and ISDN PRI terminal equipment
Pulse repetition rate
Output pulse templates
Adjustment of signal voltage
Output power
Encoded analog content
Unequipped subrate channels
Limitations on TE connecting to PSDS (Types I, II and III)
Limitations on TE connecting ISDN BRI
Signal power limitations for ADSL
177
TIA-968-A, A-1, A2, A-3, A-4, A-5
4.4.5.2
4.5
4.5.1
TIA-968-B
4.3.4.2
5.1.1
4.5.2.1.1
5.1.2
4.5.2.1.2
5.1.3
4.5.2.2
5.1.4
4.5.2.3
4.5.2.3.1
4.5.2.3.2
4.5.2.4
4.5.2.5
5.1.5
5.1.5.1
5.1.5.2
5.1.5.3
4.7
4.5.2.6
5.1.5.5
4.5.2.7
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.5.1.1
4.5.5.1.2
4.5.5.2.1
4.5.5.2.2
4.5.6
4.5.7
5.1.11.1
5.1.5.6
5.1.5.7
5.1.5.8
5.1.5.8.1
5.1.5.8.2
5.1.5.8.3
5.1.5.8.4
5.2.1.4
5.1.5.9, 5.2.1.5
4.5.8.1
5.2.2.1
4.5.8.2
4.5.8.2.1
4.5.8.2.2
4.5.8.2.3
4.5.8.2.4
4.5.8.2.5
4.5.8.2.6
4.5.8.3
4.5.8.4
4.5.9.1
5.2.4
5.2.4.1
5.2.4.2
5.2.4.3
5.2.4.4
5.2.4.5
5.2.4.6
5.2.3.1
5.3.1.1
5.3.2.1
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
TIA-968-A, A-1, A2, A-3, A-4, A-5
Description
Signal power limitations for xDSL (IDSL, SHDSL, HDSL2,
SMC4, HDSL4, SDSL, VDSL, SMC 2, SMC 3, SMC 7 &
SMC 8)
4.5.9.2.1
Longitudinal output voltage limitations for ADSL
4.5.9.1.4
Longitudinal output voltage limitations for xDSL (IDSL,
SHDSL, HDSL2, SMC4, HDSL4, SDSL, VDSL, SMC 2,
SMC 3, SMC 7 & SMC 8)
4.5.9.2.3
Signal power limitations for EHDSL
Signal power limitations for VDSL2
Longitudinal output voltage limitations for VDSL2
Encoded analog content
Series devices
Transverse Balance Limitations
Technical description and application
Analog voice band transverse balance limits
4.5.9.2.4
4.5.9.3
4.5.9.3.3
4.5.10
4.6.1.4
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.2
Digital equipment (subrate, PSDS, DS1, PRI & BRI)
4.6.3
ADSL equipment
4.6.4
Other DSL equipment (IDSL, SHDSL, HDSL2, SMC4,
HDSL4, SDSL, VDSL, VDSL2, SMC 2, SMC 3, SMC 7 &
SMC 8)
4.6.5
TIA-968-B
5.3.1.1, 5.3.4.1,
5.3.5.1, 5.3.5.2,
5.3.6.1, 5.3.7.1,
5.3.8.1, 5.3.9.1
5.3.2.3
5.3.1.3, 5.3.4.3,
5.3.5.4 , 5.3.6.3,
5.3.7.3, 5.3.8.3,
5.3.9.3
5.3.4.1
5.3.8.1
5.3.8.3
4.5
6.2
5.2.1.6
5.1.6
5.2.2.2, 5.2.3.2,
5.2.4.7, 5.3.2.2
5.3.2.2
5.3.2.2, 5.3.4.2,
5.3.5.3, 5.3.6.2,
5.3.7.2, 5.3.8.2,
5.3.9.2
On-Hook Impedance Limitations
General
Limitations on equipment intended for operation on loopstart telephone facilities
On-hook resistance, metallic and longitudinal (up to 100
VDC)
On-hook resistance, metallic and longitudinal (100 to 200
VDC)
DC current during ringing
Ringing frequency impedance (metallic)
Ringing frequency impedance (longitudinal)
Limitations on individual equipment intended for operation
on ground start telephone facilities
DC current during ringing
Ringing frequency impedance (metallic)
4.7
4.7.1
5.1.7.1, 5.1.8.1
4.7.2
5.1.7.2
4.7.2.1
5.1.7.2.1
4.7.2.2
5.1.7.2.2
4.7.2.3
4.7.2.4
4.7.2.5
5.1.7.2.3
4.7.3
5.1.8.2
4.7.3.1
4.7.3.2
Ringer equivalence definition
4.7.4
Ringer equivalence for equipment operating on loop-start
telephone facilities
4.7.4.1
5.1.8.2.1
5.1.8.2.2
5.1.7.2.6,
5.1.8.2.3
5.1.7.2.7,
5.1.8.2.4
178
5.1.7.2.4
5.1.7.2.5
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Description
TIA-968-A, A-1, A2, A-3, A-4, A-5
Maximum ringer equivalence
4.7.5
OPS interfaces for PBX with DID (ring trip requirement)
Transitioning to the off-hook state
4.7.6
4.7.8
Manual programming of repertory dialers
4.7.8.1
Automatic stutter dial tone detection
4.7.8.2
Billing Protection
4.8
4.4
Call duration requirements on data equipment
Approved protective circuitry
Approved terminal equipment for data applications
Voice and data equipment on-hook signal requirements
Voice and data equipment loop current requirements
Signaling interference requirements
4.8.1
4.8.1.1
4.8.1.2
4.8.2
4.8.3
4.8.4
4.4.1
4.4.1.1
4.4.1.2
4.4.2
5.1.7.4, 5.1.8.4
4.4.3
On-hook requirements for approved subrate and
1.544Mbps digital terminal equipment
4.8.5
4.4.2.3
Off-hook signal requirements for approved terminal
equipment connecting to 1.544 Mbps digital services
4.8.6
5.2.4.8
Billing protection requirements for direct inward dialing
4.8.7
5.1.9.4, 5.2.4.9
Connectors & Wiring Configurations
6
4.6
179
TIA-968-B
5.1.7.2.8,
5.1.8.2.5
5.1.11.5
5.1.7.3, 5.1.8.3
5.1.7.3.1,
5.1.8.3.1
5.1.7.3.2,
5.1.8.3.2
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Annex C (informative) – Informative references
C.1.
TIA TSB-129-A, U.S. Network Connections Regulatory Approval Guide, June 2002,
and its Addendum 1, TSB-129-A-1, are both available from links at the TR-41 Web
page: www.tiaonline.org/standards/sfg/tr-41
C.2.
Industry Canada, Standard CS-03, Standard for Terminal Equipment, Systems,
Network Protection Devices and Connection Arrangements, available at:
http://strategis.ic.gc.ca/epic/site/smt-gst.nsf/en/sf01590e.html
C.3.
ANSI T1.413-1998, Network and Customer Installation Interfaces – Asymmetric
Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL) Metallic Interface
C.4
ITU-T Recommendation G.991.2 (2003), Single-pair high-speed digital subscriber
line (SHDSL) transceivers
C.5
47CFR Part 68, Code of Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 47, FCC Part 68,
Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network
C.6
ACTA, Guidelines and Procedures for submittal of information for inclusion in the
ACTA database of approved Telephone Terminal Equipment ("TTE")
For additional information about references, contact the respective organizations at the
following addresses:
ACTA
Administrative Council for Terminal Attachment
c/o ATIS
1200 G Street, NW
Washington, DC 20005
+1-202-628-6380
www.part68.org
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
1819 L Street, NW
Washington, DC 20036
+1-212-642-4900
www.ansi.org
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
445 12th St. SW
Washington DC 20554
+1-202-418-0190
www.fcc.gov
IC
Industry Canada
Spectrum Management and Telecommunications Sector
180
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
300 Slater Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0C8 CANADA
+1- 613-954-5031
http://strategis.ic.gc.ca/epic/site/smt-gst.nsf/en/Home
ITU
International Telecommunication Union
Place des Nations
CH-1211 Geneva 20 Switzerland
+41 22 730 51 11
www.itu.int
TIA
Telecommunications Industry Association
2500 Wilson Blvd., Suite 300
Arlington, VA 22201 USA
+1-703-907-7700
www.tiaonline.org
181
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
DRAFT Revision & Change Log
(This section for originating committee use only and is to be deleted prior to balloting.)
Rev 0.1 (18 July 2006):
This initial draft was created from a file provided by Phil Havens, former editor of ‘968-A.
This draft was dated 3 Sept 2002, and was believed to be the final draft of ‘968-A. To
prepare this draft for use as a “starting point” on the ‘968-B revision effort, the following
was done:
 All changes shown in the draft were “accepted” without review.
 Change tracking, document protect, and modification passwords were turned off.
 Change tracking page left over from ‘968-A was deleted, and this page was added.
 Document was printed, and manually and visually compared page by page (except
for section 6, which will be deleted later) to TIA-968-A as published, seeking any
discrepancies. (None were found.)
 Headers changed to “PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B).” The title page was
changed accordingly.
Rev 0.2 (25 July 2006):
Incorporated changes described in TIA-968-A-1 (addendum 1 to TIA-968-A), published
July 2003, which were in brief:
 Replaced 4.5.2.1.2, Table 4.6, and 4.5.10. (Tables renumbered later – see below.)
 Replaced entire contents of Annex A (grandfathering).
 Made a series of 8 reference changes (errata)
Rev 0.3 (27 July 2006):
Incorporated changes described in TIA-968-A-2 (addendum 2 to TIA-968-A), published
January 2004, which were in brief:
 Text changes in 4.4.2(b) and 4.4.3.
 Additional text in introduction of section 6.
Rev 0.4 (2 August 2006):
Incorporated changes described in TIA-968-A-3 (addendum 3 to TIA-968-A), published
February 2005, which were in brief:

Added T1.417-2003 to list of normative refs

Modified ADSL definition under 1.3 and header statement in 4.4.1.3.

Several new or revised or renumbered under 4.5.2 and 4.5.9.

Deleted 4.5.8.1.8.

Changes last “XN” formula under 4.5.8.2.6.

Revised 4.6.4 and added new line to Table 4.12 (later changed to 4.18).

New 4.6.5.
From the “Foreword” of this addendum, these changes were intended to:

Add limitations at the interface from non-approved external signal sources
182
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)

Clarify the requirements associated with DC signals provided to equipment
connected to through transmission equipment

Correct a typographical error in the permissible code words for unequipped
subrate channels

Correct a typographical error in the Definitions where Annex B was inadvertently
referenced instead of Annex C

Identify requirements for ADSL2 terminal equipment and adds requirements for
ADSL2+ terminal equipment

Add requirements for ADSL terminal equipment with extended upstream
operation

Add requirements for HDSL2, HDSL4, SHDSL and VDSL terminal equipment

Add requirements for generic stationary and generic short-term stationary DSL
terminal equipment
Rev 0.5 (10 August 2006):
Incorporated changes described in TIA-968-A-4 (addendum 4 to TIA-968-A), final draft
dated 3 May 2006, which were in brief:
 Normative ref changes in clause 1.2
 Added text to 4.5.9.2.3
 New 4.5.9.2.4, including formulas, Tables 4.15(a) & (b) (numbering changed later –
see below), and clarifying text.
 New 4.6.1.4
 Minor editing to 4.7.2 & 4.7.3
 Deleted 4.6.2.9 and 4.7.7. This forced renumbering of 4.7.8 to 4.7.7 since clause
numbering is automatic, and renumbered subclauses 4.7.8.1 & 4.7.8.2.
 Appended four new rows to Table 4.12 (later changed to 4.18).
 Changed Figure 4.11(a) (later became 4.14(a) in Rev 4.0).
 Added new Figures 4.13 & 4.14 (later became 4.14 & 4.15).
 Replaced entire clause 6 with abbreviated paragraphs describing connectors &
wiring configurations, referencing TIA-1096-A for details.
From the “Foreword” of this addendum, these changes were intended to:
 Deleted Type “Z” ringer waiver.
 Added new terminations for testing series devices used with ADSL modems.
 Added new ESHDSL requirements.
 Corrected minor typographical errors.
 Defined transverse balance requirements out to 30 MHz to accommodate VDSL and
other DSL equipment with operating ranges above 3MHz.
 Deleted the physical and contact specifications for connectors, and references TIA1096-A for such criteria.
Rev 0.6 (10 August 2006):
This revision encompassed several editorial changes in addition to those from previous
revisions. These changes included:
 “Accepted” all previous changes, clearing all editing marks and notes.
 Performed a top-to-bottom visual review, looking for any editing artifacts, MS-word
highlights, or other “funny things” that were easy editorial corrections.
183
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)


Replaced Table of Contents with new, automatically generated table to capture all
previous changes and correct page numbers shown. Similarly updated List of
Figures and List of Tables.
Cleared the acknowledgement table for list of persons who contributed to current
revision.
184
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Rev 1.0 (10 August 2006):
This draft revision was set for committee review at August 2006 meeting. Re-numbered
Rev 0.6 to 1.0, following practice that draft targeted for committee review at a regular
quarterly meeting is incremented to next whole revision number.
Rev 1.1 (25 September 2006):
This revision encompassed changes approved by TR-41.9 at the August 2006 meeting
in Montreal. In brief, these were:
 Changed title for 4.5.9.2.3 to “Longitudinal output voltage for generic DSL modems,”
as per TR41.9-06-08-014-L
 Made several global editorial changes as per TR41.9-06-08-016-M, page 4, four
items under “Editorial issues…,” which included:
o Changed format of annex headings so the name of the annex also appears in the
table of contents.
o Re-numbering of certain tables in the 4.1x range so they are in correct numerical
sequence in the document. Also changed references in text accordingly. For
reference, here’s what was changed:
What was labeled or ref’ed as
Was changed to
Table X
Table 4.11
Table 4.15(a)
Table 4.12(a)
Table 4.15(b)
Table 4.12(b)
Table 4.11
Table 4.13
Table 4.12
Table 4.14(b)
Table 4.13
Table 4.15
Table 4.14(b)
Table 4.16
(NOTE – These were all changed again later in Rev 4.0 – See below.)
o
o
o

Incorporated consistent spacing between consecutive sentences to two spaces.
Altered inconsistent paragraph alignment to be consistently “left justified.”
Incorporated consistent capitalization according to specific style references,
specifically the TIA and IEEE style manuals, IEEE-CS abbreviations and terms
guide, and Webster’s dictionary.
Also made several additional editorial changes to improve consistency or correct
mistakes, including:
o Adopted consistent use of comma following “e.g.”
o Corrected table numbers in Annex B from “Table A.x” to “Table B.x”
o Corrected cases where two spaces were used between “Table” and the table
number. Changed to one space consistently through document.
o Adopted consistent use of figure and table titles format as per 1992 TIA Style
Manual, but with em-dash (MS-Word autoformat default) instead of en-dash.
o Changed paragraph format as needed for consistency, employing a “:” at the end
of titles, then two spaces, then complete sentence starting with a capital letter,
contained on the same line and following lines (instead of new paragraph).
o Adopted convention of spelling out “two-wire” and “four-wire,” and changed this
throughout the document.
185
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Rev 1.2 (2 October 2006):
This revision incorporated changes agreed to by the TR-41.9.1 WG prior to the
November quarterly meetings, and two additional editorial changes.
 Tim Lawler’s added definitions in clause 1.3 for TU-R, STU-R, SHDSL, HDSL2 &
HDSL4, as per his e-mail of 26 Sept 2006. WG consensus achieved via e-mail.
 Additional editorial changes included:
o Changed “blank page” notices as required to use same message in all cases.
o Corrected ref to T1.417 in 4.5.9.1.
Rev 2.0 (6 November 2006):
This draft revision was set for committee review at the November 2006 meeting. Renumbered Revision 1.2 to 2.0, following practice that draft targeted for committee review
at a regular quarterly meeting is incremented to next whole revision number.
Rev 2.1 (17 January 2007):
This revision incorporated several relatively simple and mostly editorial changes. Some
were done globally. Most of these were discussed and agreed to by the TR-41.9.1 WG
at the November 2006 meeting in Las Vegas, or discovered during subsequent editing.
 Accepted all changes highlighted in Rev 2.0 (e.g., -007), clearing all MS-word
generated editing marks and notes.
 Replaced all incidences of the ohms-symbol with the word “ohms” or “ohm” as
appropriate and spelled-out. (The ohms symbol is in the symbol font, while the rest
of the document uses Arial. Some conversions such as “doc” to “pdf” don’t translate
symbol font well. Changing to the spelled-out Arial version negates the entire
problem.)
 Replaced all references to “TSB-31-B” with updated “TSB-31-C,” and any associated
references to “TIA/EIA” with simply “TIA.”
 All notes to figures and tables were altered to reflect a consistent format.
 Populated the acknowledgements list.
 Removed first title of two that previously appeared in paragraph 4.8.6.
 Moved the reference to G.991.2 and to Part 68 from normative reference list to
informative reference list in Annex E.
 Changed clause 4.1 from “Labeling” to “Reserved.”
 Renumbered figures from 4.7 to fix duplicate numbering problem. (Mick Maytum
noted in e-mail of 11 Nov 2006 that he had discovered there were two “Figure 4.7,”
on pages 66 and 78.)
Rev 2.2 (18 January 2007):
This revision incorporated the changes shown in the modified “Rev 2.0” document that
was edited by Phil Havens during the November 2006 meeting in Las Vegas. This
modified document is archived as: TR41.9.1-06-11-007M. Changes included:
 A new Foreword was incorporated.
 Broadened the scope of ADSL services in Scope, 1.1(j) to include several other DSL
varieties, and user adjustments can’t cause TE to become non-compliant.
 Fixed titles for Figures 1.5 & 1.6.
 Replaced Figure 4.1, 4.2, & 4.3 with new graphics from Mick Maytum’s submission
TR-41.9.1-06-11-006 (paper on waveshape history).
 Clause 4.3, “Leakage Current Limitations,” was entirely replaced (as per notes added
to TR41.9.1-06-11-007M). This included a new Table 4.1.
 Modified text giving example in parens at 4.5.2.1.2.1(a).
186
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)


Added exemption phrase for “central-office-implemented telephones” to 4.6.2.1.
Annex A, first paragraph, modified grandfathering to specify applicability to U.S.
Rev 2.3 (22 January 2007):
This revision incorporated the changes shown Tim Lawler’s submission (TR41.9.1-06-11008) to the November 2006 meeting in Las Vegas. This changed Table 4.13 (Transverse
balance test criteria – Analog voice band) and replaced Table 4.14 with two new tables. All
references in text to Table 4.14 were changed to Table 4.14(b).
Rev 2.4 (26 January 2007):
This revision incorporated a large number of editorial changes provided by C. Gallagher and
H. Dawood of Industry Canada, who reviewed Rev 2.0 for section, table, and figure
references. These changes affected references to:
 Sections 1.3.29, 1.3.55, 4.7.7.1, 4.7.7.2, A.4(a), A.4(b), and A.5(a)(1 to 3).
 Figures 4.8 through 4.15
 Table B.2 (refs to above figures and removed sections in section 6)
Rev 3.0 (26 January 2007):
This revision was prepared for review by the TR41.9.1 WG at their February 2007 meeting
in Houston. Following previous practice, drafts submitted for WG review at regular meetings
are incremented to the next whole number. Additional changes and revisions included:
 Spelling and grammar checks were performed.
 The automatically generated tables of contents, figures, and tables were regenerated to capture any changes made to date.
Rev 3.1 (4 April 2007):
Rev. 3.1 contains edits approved by the WG at the February 2007 meeting, which were
incorporated in the -002M and -003M documents. These changes included:
 Changed reference to “Part 68 Application Guide” to TSB-129-A in Annex E
(informative references), and added Industry Canada contact information.
 Changed voltages in equation in 4.6.1 to eM and eL to VM and VL. and elsewhere in
associated text in 4.6.1.1. Also changed Z1 to RL, and Zo to RM, and added refs to
Table 4.14(a).
 Under 4.6.1.3 (page 73), changed Table 4.13 to 4.13(a), collapsed f1 and f2 rows
into single row saying “Frequency Range” and “200 Hz – 4 kHz,” and changed
algebraic terms to conform to 4.6.1.1 above.
 In Figure 4.8 (later changed to 4.10), changed spec for R1 to say “…ZOSC + R1 = RM
= 600 ohms”
 Revised List of Tables to reflect changes in this rev.
Rev 3.2 (9 April 2007):
Rev. 3.2 focused on the changes detailed by Lawler and Mulvihill in their submission
TR41.9.1-06-11-009R2M, “Revised Proposed ADSL All Digital Mode Requirements for TIA968-B.” This was originally intended for the November 2006 meeting, but subsequent
changes delayed its completion to February 2007. These changes focused on “all digital
mode” requirements in CS-03, Part VIII, which were included in TIA-968-B in the interest of
harmonization. For the most part, the material in -009R2M was simply cut-and-pasted into
the draft ‘968-B. (Note: -009R2M was a late submission to the February 2007 meeting that
replaced -009R1M.)
187
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Rev 3.3 (10 April 2007):
Rev. 3.3 includes Mick Maytum’s contribution on “Environmental Testing – Surge waveform
maximums and minimums,” filed during the May 2007 meeting but originally sent via e-mail
on 5 February 2007. These additions affected clause 4.2.
Rev 3.4 (11 April 2007):
This revision handled a series of clean-up tasks prior to closing the revisions prior to the
May 2007 TR41 meetings. These included a spell-check and renumbering of tables and
figures to accommodate several new ones that were added, and regeneration of the table of
contents, and lists of figures and tables, to ensure their correctness. Figure and table
renumbering is summarized as follows:
Rev 4.0 (11 April 2007):
This revision was prepared for review by the TR41.9.1 WG at their May 2007 meeting in St.
Petersburg. Following previous practice, drafts submitted for WG review at regular meetings
are incremented to the next whole number.
Rev 4.1 (6 July 2007):
Focus of this revision was the large number of styles imbedded in the document, especially
those used for lists, which contributed to layout inconsistency. This situation probably
occurred gradually, as each editor created a new major revision. Rather than using existing
188
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
styles, additions probably were made such that they created new styles inadvertently. By
the time of Draft 4.0 (April 2007), there were 136 individual styles in the “Styles and
Formatting” list. Reviewed every line and paragraph in the document, reformatting as
needed to minimize number of styles. This effort reduced number of styles to 111. (Thanks
to Mick Maytum for contributing style management tips!)
Rev 4.2 (16 July 2007):
This revision focused on pre-restructuring editorial and other corrections and changes, as
noted by the WG in edited documents, in particular TR41.9.1-07-05-001M. This included
removal or re-naming of some annexes in preparation for restructuring.
Restructuring:
A complete restructuring of the material in this Standard was accomplished over the next
few revisions. Great care was taken to avoid introducing errors or unintended deletions.
These changes were based on the following documents:

Bishop, Trone (Verizon), “TIA-968-A/TIA-968-B Cross Reference Chart,” document
number TR41.9.1-06-11-003M.

Correspondence between Tim Lawler (Cisco) and Phil Havens (TR41.9 Chair) on 8
February 2007, modifying Bishop’s cross-reference chart for new paragraphs after
5.3 (focused on DSL requirements). This contribution is also known as “-003MR1.”

Later correspondence with Tim Lawler on 23-24 July 2007 regarding anticipated
submission covering new clause 5.3.

Notes added to TIA-968-B Draft 4.0 by the WG at their May 2007 meeting in St.
Petersburg, revised document number TR41.9.1-07-05-001M. These notes directed
the movement of selected paragraphs to new locations in the new structure.
Rev 4.3 (19 July 2007):
Document re-structuring began with this revision, which included necessary macro or large
scale changes. No material was deleted to ensure that nothing was lost, but instead new,
temporary chapters were created containing the original material. This material was moved
into the new structure piecemeal as per the WG approved documents listed above. Since
paragraph numbering is keyed to section numbers, most numbering automatically corrected
itself when material was moved. When complete, these temporary chapters should be
empty, at which time they can be deleted.
Restructuring in this revision proceeded as follows:
1. Section breaks were found in prototype testing to sometimes have unintended,
negative effects when moving large chunks of material around. Consequently,
section breaks were used only for the front matter, and all later section breaks were
deleted, substituting page breaks as needed.
2. Names for Chapters 4 and 6 were changed to identify as “old” to keep track of their
origin. Clarifying “helper” intros were added. (These “old” chapters will be deleted
later when no longer needed.)
3. Deleted section 5 (Complaints Procedures).
4. Changed names of Chapters 1, 2, and 3 to new headings: 1. Scope, 2. Normative
References, and 3. Terms and Definitions. Removed clause heading 1.1 (no longer
needed since entire section is “scope”).
189
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
5. Added headers for new sections 4 (Common Requirements) and 5 (Interface
Requirements), ready to accept material from old sections.
6. Moved normative references (old clause 1.2) and definitions (old clause 1.3) to new
location in sections 2 and 3, respectfully. Added new headers for clause 3.2
(acronyms & symbols) and 3.3 (simulators & terminations – to be moved later).
7. Updated automatically generated tables in front matter so changes are accurately
shown.
At this point, chapters 4 and 5 remain empty, but all material from previous Rev 4.2 was
retained (nothing was deleted). Most of this is in the new, temporary chapters 6 and 7.
Rev 4.4 (23 July 2007):
Building the “Common Requirements” in section 4 and framework for the new section 5 was
the focus of this revision, accomplished in the following steps:
1. As mentioned in Rev 4.3 above, the “old” section 4 had been moved (nothing
deleted) into a temporary section 6.
2. The section headings in the new section 4 were added first.
3. Material from section 6 was moved (cut and pasted) into place in section 4, following
the cross-reference chart in TR41.9-06-11-003M to indicate what went where. Since
clause and section numbering was set to automatic, the correct numbers usually
appeared when the material was moved en masse this way. In some cases, heading
styles had to be incremented within moved material so it fit into its new home.
4. Section 7 (Old section 6) was completely depleted, and was deleted. Section 6 (old
section 4) was not entirely depleted, but notes were left there when material was
moved out.
5. Major clause headings (5.1, 5.2, 5.3) in section 5 were added. Subheadings were
added within clauses 5.1 and 5.2, as per -003M document.
6. Following -003M, sections from the old section 4 were moved (cut and pasted) into
new locations in sections 5.1 and 5.2. (Tracking these changes was more
challenging than anticipated and may have produced some unintended errors.)
Rev 4.5 (2 August 2007):
Continuing with the restructuring, Rev 4.5 focused on the new clause 5.3. New headings
were inserted into clause 5.3 as per the -003MR1 document. Following guidance from Tim
Lawler (Cisco) that he was preparing a submission to complete clause 5.3, no further
changes were made here.
Rev 4.6 (3 August 2007):
Figures 1.1-1.12 (simulator circuits) were moved to various sections in section 5, as per WG
instructions added to the modified Draft 4.0, TR41.9.1-07-05-001M. In some cases, this
resulted in multiple destination copies where instructions were to move figures to two new
locations. Move instructions imbedded in old Sections 4.4 and 4.6 were also checked and
completed as needed. Old figure numbers were retained for the time being, pending
additional movement or revision.
Rev 4.7 (6 August 2007):
190
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
This revision incorporates several re-drawn schematics and block diagrams sent in by Mick
Maytum. Thanks, Mick!
Rev 5.0 (7 August 2007):
This revision was prepared for review by the TR41.9.1 WG at their August 2007 meeting in
Ottawa. All tables were regenerated to ensure accuracy, and a spelling check was
performed. Following previous practice, drafts submitted for WG review at regular meetings
are incremented to the next whole number.
Rev 5.1 (27 September 2007):
Mick Maytum’s figures from his contribution TR41.9.1-07-08-004M that had not been
previously added were incorporated.
Rev 5.2 (3 October 2007):
Incorporated all changes in Trone Bishop’s revised cross reference chart (see TR41.9.1-0708-005MR1) for sections up through 5.2.4, and the annexes. (Assumed that 5.3 was
covered by Tim Lawler’s contribution?) Also updated the tables of contents, tables, and
figures.
Rev 5.3 (4 October 2007):
Incorporated all changes added by WG to the “Draft 5.0” document (TR41.9.1-07-08-001MR1) at their Ottawa meeting on 13 August 2007.
Rev 5.4 (11 October 2007):
Incorporated all changes from Lawler & DSL task group, as per their document TR41.9.107-08-003-MR1. None of the table or figure numbers were revised at this rev, but subclause
numbers in 5.3 were corrected to fit the draft.
Rev 5.4 (18 October 2007):
Revised the acknowledgement list, following Whitesell’s guidance in TR41-07-02-009-L and
TR41-07-05-011-LR1.
Rev 6.0 (19 October 2007):
This revision was prepared for review by the TR41.9.1 WG at their November 2007 meeting
in Albuquerque. All tables were regenerated to ensure accuracy, and a spelling check was
performed. Following previous practice, drafts submitted for WG review at regular meetings
are incremented to the next whole number.
Rev 6.1 (9 January 2008):
This revision incorporates all changes noted by the TR41.9.1 WG into draft 6.0 (see
document TR41.9.1-07-11-002MR2) during their November 2007 meeting in Albuquerque.
These changes included those contributed by Dawood & Mulvihill (see TR41.9.1-07-11003MR1) which the working group incorporated into the ‘-002MR2 document.
Rev 6.2 (16 January 2008):
This revision incorporates Bishop’s modifications to draft 5.0 (see TR41.9.1-07-11-007MR1),
modifying parts of clauses 5.1 and 5.2. When incorporation of these changes were
complete, changes in 5.1 and 5.2 that were shown in -002MR2 were reviewed to ensure that
the changes from both documents were included.
Rev 6.3 (18 January 2008):
191
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
“Acronyms and Abbreviations” from Tim Lawler (his contribution TR41.9.1-07-11-008L) were
incorporated in this revision as a new clause 3.2. To improve consistency, any acronyms or
abbreviations pre-existing in the “Definitions” list were also moved or reproduced and the
format of the definitions, acronyms, and abbreviations were edited as needed.
Rev 6.4 (22 January 2008):
Used new “digital terminal equipment” diagram from Mick Maytum to replace equivalent but
less distinct drawings in draft.
Rev 6.5 (23 January 2008):
This revision included a basket of structural changes that had been discussed at the
November 2007 WG meeting, including:
 Removed temporary section 6, which had contained all material in the old section 4
before restructuring (i.e., up to Rev 4.2).
 Removed empty clause 4.1. This forced renumbering of all subsequent paragraphs
under section 4, so attempted to decrement text references to numbered paragraphs
as appropriate.
 Changed the Table of Contents to show all headings down to Heading 3 (e.g.,
subclauses numbered like “4.3.2”). Material was reorganized as necessary to fix
situations where large paragraphs appeared in the TofC. To avoid listing the
definitions, acronyms, and abbreviations in the TofC, these were reconfigured
without Heading 3 paragraph numbering. All headings down to Heading 3 were set
to bold font in accordance with 1992 TIA Style Guide, 4.12.7.
 Finally, also re-generated the TofC, and lists of tables and figures.
Rev 6.6 (24 January 2008):
This revision focused on editorial changes to improve consistency and bring the Standard in
line with the TIA Style Guide and other style and acronym resources.
Rev 7.0 (25 January 2008):
This revision was prepared for review by the TR41.9.1 WG at their February 2008 meeting
in New Orleans. The tables of contents, figures, and tables were regenerated to ensure
accuracy, and a spelling check was performed. A review of MS-Word formatting styles was
done toward reducing style proliferation. Following previous practice, drafts submitted for
WG review at regular meetings are incremented to the next whole number.
Rev 7.1 (7 March 2008):
Section 9 (component approval) of TSB-129-A was inserted into this draft as a new Section
6. This was done by first excerpting Section 9 from a PDF copy of “as published” TSB-129A, then converting it to a ‘doc’ file using ScanSoft PDF Converter Pro Version 4.1. The
resulting text was carefully inserted into Rev 7.1 of TSB-968-B without formatting, then
formatted using existing styles and capitalization conventions used in the rest of ‘968-B to
ensure consistency. References in any of this inserted material to “TIA/EIA/IS-968” were
changed to “this Standard.”
Rev 7.2 (28 March 2008):
Incorporated two re-drawn figures from Mick Maytum’s contributions, TR41.9.1-08-02-010M
and -011, affecting figures on pages 35 and 73.
192
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Rev 7.3 (9 April 2008):
Incorporated changes noted by the WG in the modified Draft 7.0, document TR41.9.1-0802-002MR1.
Rev 7.4 (18 April 2008):
Incorporated changes noted in Bishop’s modified document TR41.9.1-08-02-008MR1.
Rev 8.0 (25 April 2008):
This revision was prepared for review by the TR41.9.1 WG at their May 2008 meeting in
Portland, OR. The tables of contents, figures, and tables were regenerated to ensure
accuracy, and a spelling check was performed. Following previous practice, drafts
submitted for WG review at regular meetings are incremented to the next whole number.
Rev 8.1 (28 May 2008):
Incorporated changes noted in WG-modified Draft 8.0, TR41.9.1-08-05-002MR1.
Rev 8.2 (3 June 2008):
Changed clause 6 title to “Special Cases,” with two major subclauses, 6.1 for “Component
Approval” and 6.2 for “Series Devices.” Subclause 4.7 was moved in entirety into the new
subclause 6.2. These changes forced renumbering of all subclauses for Component
Approval (header styles used were reduced by one), internal paragraph references were
fixed, and formatting was changed for self-consistency with other sections of this Standard.
Rev 8.3 (4 June 2008):
Incorporated replacement of all material in clause 6.1 as noted in WG-modified contribution
TR41.9.1-08-05-004MR1. The numbering scheme used in this contribution differed from
that in the draft, so the material was mapped into the draft and re-numbered appropriately.
Formatting was changed as needed to ensure self-consistency with other sections of this
Standard.
Rev 8.4 (6 June 2008):
Incorporated changes noted in TR41.9.1-08-05-006MR1. This added a new clause under
4.0 for “Allowable net amplification between ports,” made several changes in subclauses
under 5.1.5 and 5.2.2, and deleted table 4.6. Also added “SF” to definitions and
abbreviations lists.
Rev 8.5 (6 June 2008):
Incorporated editorial changes only noted in TR41.9.1-08-05-010L due to conflicts with WGmodified draft 8.0 (TR41.9.1-08-05-002MR1) changes that were previously incorporated in
Rev 8.1 (see above).
Rev 8.6 (11 June 2008):
Incorporated the TIA-968-A cross reference table from TR41.9-08-05-009MR1 into Annex B
of the current draft. All ‘heading-3’ titles were reviewed for editorial consistency, and the
Table of Contents was updated. This table was compared against the titles shown in the
Annex B table and corrections applied to table B.1 as needed.
Rev 8.7 (2 July 2008):
Incorporated several changes noted by WG in 26 June 2008 teleconference, including
changed titles for 4.4.1 and 4.4.2, and reference changes to clauses 6.1 and 4.8/4.7 as
noted by Trone Bishop in correspondence of 26 June.
193
PN 3-0016-RV2 (To become TIA-968-B)
Rev 8.8 (2 July 2008):
Replaced or added as appropriate from Tim Lawler’s contribution TR41.9.1-08-06-004 under
subclauses 5.3.8.4.1 and 5.3.8.2. Added “RBW” to abbreviations and definitions.
Rev 8.91 (7 July 2008):
Replaced cross reference table B.1 from Tim Lawler’s contribution TR41.9.1-08-06-005MR1
(with modifications from 24 June teleconference) in Annex B. Fixed incidences of
inconsistent capitalization, font size, and cell centering.
Note: Began using rev numbered in hundredths (e.g. “8.91”) because needed more revision
iteration numbers prior to 9.0 – No other significance to this numbering.
Rev 8.92 (8 July 2008):
Replaced subclause 5.1.11 (OPS interface requirements) with material from Trone Bishop’s
contribution TR41.9.1-08-06-006L.
Rev 8.93 (8 July 2008):
Replaced “Scope” with new “Scope, Purpose, and Application” from Trone Bishop’s
contribution TR41.9.1-08-06-007L, and made several minor editorial refinements.
Rev 9.0 (9 July 2008):
This revision was prepared for review by the TR41.9.1 WG at their August 2008 meeting in
Halifax, NS. The tables of contents, figures, and tables were regenerated to ensure
accuracy, and a spelling check was performed. Following previous practice, drafts
submitted for WG review at regular meetings are incremented to the next whole number.
# # #
194